SEMESTER 3

PRODUCTION ENGINEERING
 SEMESTER S3

MATHEMATICS FOR ELECTRICAL SCIENCE AND PHYSICAL

SCIENCE – 3

(Common to B & C Groups)

Course Code GYMAT301 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hr. 30 Min.

Basic knowledge in
Prerequisites (if any) Course Type Theory
complex numbers.

Course Objectives:

1. To introduce the concept and applications of Fourier transforms in various engineering fields.
2. To introduce the basic theory of functions of a complex variable, including residue integration
and conformal transformation, and their applications

SYLLABUS

Module Syllabus Description Contact

No. Hours
Fourier Integral, From Fourier series to Fourier Integral, Fourier Cosine and
Sine integrals, Fourier Cosine and Sine Transform, Linearity, Transforms of
1 Derivatives, Fourier Transform and its inverse, Linearity, Transforms of 9
Derivative.

(Text 1: Relevant topics from sections 11.7, 11.8, 11.9)

Complex Function, Limit, Continuity, Derivative, Analytic functions,
Cauchy-Riemann Equations (without proof), Laplace’s Equations, Harmonic

2 functions, Finding harmonic conjugate, Conformal mapping, Mappings of 9

w= 𝑧 , 𝑤=𝑒 ,w= , 𝑤=𝑠𝑖𝑛𝑧.

(Text 1: Relevant topics from sections 13.3, 13.4, 17.1, 17.2, 17.4)
 Complex Integration: Line integrals in the complex plane (Definition &
Basic properties), First evaluation method, Second evaluation method,
Cauchy’s integral theorem (without proof) on simply connected domain,
3 9
Independence of path, Cauchy integral theorem on multiply connected
domain (without proof), Cauchy Integral formula (without proof).

(Text 1: Relevant topics from sections 14.1, 14.2, 14.3)

Taylor series and Maclaurin series, Laurent series (without proof),
Singularities and Zeros – Isolated Singularity, Poles, Essential Singularities,
Removable singularities, Zeros of Analytic functions – Poles and Zeros,
4 9
Formulas for Residues, Residue theorem (without proof), Residue
Integration- Integral of Rational Functions of cosθ and sinθ.

(Text 1: Relevant topics from sections 15.4, 16.1, 16.2, 16.3, 16.4)

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks , ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

 2 Questions from each  Each question carries 9 marks.
module.  Two questions will be given from each module, out
 Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
carrying 3 marks  Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub 60
divisions.
(8x3 =24marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)

Determine the Fourier transforms of functions and apply them to solve

CO1 K3
problems arising in engineering.
Understand the analyticity of complex functions and apply it in
CO2 K3
conformal mapping.
Compute complex integrals using Cauchy's integral theorem and
CO3 K3
Cauchy's integral formula.
Understand the series expansion of complex function about a
CO4 K3
singularity and apply residue theorem to compute real integrals.

Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 3 - 2 - - - - - - - 2
CO2 3 3 - 2 - - - - - - - 2
CO3 3 3 - 2 - - - - - - - 2
CO4 3 3 - 2 - - - - - - - 2

Text Books
Name of the Edition and
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher Year
1 Advanced Engineering John Wiley & Sons 10th edition,
Erwin Kreyszig
Mathematics 2016
 Reference Books
Edition and
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s Name of the Publisher
Year
rd
1 Dennis G. Zill, Patrick D. 3 edition,
Complex Analysis Jones & Bartlett
Shanahan 2015

2 Higher Engineering McGraw-Hill 39th edition,

B. V. Ramana
Mathematics Education 2023
44th
3 Higher Engineering
B.S. Grewal Khanna Publishers edition,
Mathematics
2018

4 Fast Fourier Transform - K.R. Rao, Do Nyeon 1st edition,

Springer
Algorithms and Applications Kim, Jae Jeong Hwang 2011
 SEMESTER S3

SOLID MECHANICS AND DESIGN

Course Code PCPET302 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3-1-0-0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)
Exam
Credits 4 2 Hrs. 30 Min.
Hours
Course
Prerequisites (if any) None Theory
Type

Course Objectives:

1.To enable students to grasp the essential concepts of stress, strain, and their
interrelationships, while identifying and describing the mechanical properties of engineering
materials.
2.To familiarize the principles of stress, strain and deformation to analyze and solve
problems in mechanical components and structures.
SYLLABUS

Module Syllabus Description Contact

No. Hours
Concept of stress, Types of Stress, Uniaxial Tension Test, Stress-Strain
Diagram, Ductile & Brittle Materials, Conditions affecting Mechanical
Properties, Hardness and Impact Strength.
Cartesian and Cylindrical Coordinate Systems, Stress at a point,
Complementary shear stress, concept of strain, shear strain, generalized
Hook’s Law.
1 11
Principal strain in terms of stress, plain stress, hydrostatic stress and plane
strain, stress-strain relations; linear elastic, rigid, perfectly plastic (non-
strain hardening), rigid plastic (strain hardening), elastic perfectly plastic,
elastic-plastic, isotropy, elastic constants and relationship among them,
overview of impact test and Hardness Test; Rockwell, Brinel &Vickers
hardness test. Concepts of creep and fatigue.
 Members subjected to uniaxial stress- bars subjected to tension and
compression, compound bars subjected to temperature change, strain

2 energy in uniaxial loading, Moduli of resilience and toughness. 11

Shear Force and Bending Moment Diagrams- Sign convention,
Relationship Between Load, Shear Force and Bending Moment.
Flexural and shear stresses in beams- members subjected to flexural
loads, pure bending, derivation of elastic flexural formula, shear stress in
beams of typical cross sections.
3 11
Principal stresses and strains-stress on oblique planes, material subjected
to stress in two mutually perpendicular planes, materials subjected
combined direct and shear stress, Mohr’s Circle.
Factor of safety, Failure Theories (overview). Torsion theory, torsion of
solid and hollow circular shafts, distribution of shear stress in shafts.
power transmitted by a solid stepped and hollow shaft, design of shafts
4 11
subjected to static loading (design for strength and rigidity). ASME code,
Design of sunk keys, Introduction to design of Rigid and flexible
coupling.

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

● 2 Questions from each ● Each question carries 9 marks.
module. ● Two questions will be given from each module, out
● Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
carrying 3 marks ● Each question can have a maximum of 3 60
subdivisions.
(8x3 =24marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcomes Knowledge
Level (KL)
Distinguish the response of materials under the action of various types
CO1 K3
of stresses
CO2 Model stress distribution in loaded beams of various types K3
Define stress system and assess response of loaded members with
CO3 K3
respect to geometry
CO4 Design of basic power transmission elements K3
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 2 1 - - - - - - - - 3

CO2 3 3 3 2 - - - - - - - 1

CO3 3 3 3 1 - - - - - - - 1

CO4 3 3 3 - - - - - - - - 2
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
McGraw Hill 3rd Ed.
1 Strength of Materials S. S. Rattan
publishers 2017
McGraw Hill 5th Ed.
2 Design of Machine elements V. B. Bhandari
publishers 2020
 Reference Books
Name of the Edition and
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher Year

1 Mechanics of Materials Ferdinand P. Beer McGraw Hill 8th Ed.2020

2 Mechanics of Materials Egor P. Popov Pearson 2nd Ed. 2015

Vikas publishing
3 Strength of Materials S. S. Bhavikatti 5th Ed.2021
House
Shigley’s Mechanical
Richard G. Buudynas, J. 11th Ed.
4 Engineering Design McGraw Hill
Keith Nisbett 2020

Data book
Name of the
Title of the Book Name of the Author/s Edition and Year
Publisher
Design Data Handbook- For K. Mahadevan, K. CBS Printers and
4th Ed. 2019
Mechanical Engineers Balaveera Reddy distributors
Faculty of Mechanical Kalaikathir
Design Data-Data book for
Engineering -PSG College Achchagam, 5th Ed. 2023
Engineers
of Technology Coimbatore

Video Links

Module
Link ID
No.
1 https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/112/107/112107146/
Lectures on the Chapters of the textbook "Mechanics of Materials”, Ferdinand P. Beer, E.
Russell Johnston Jr., John T. DeWolf & David F. Mazurek.
2
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=GuIYMVHvnhs&list=PLAjJ9epAHCkz-
vpeUJatstaKOtBHHyZI_&pp=iAQB
Machine Design -Prof. Ramesh Singh(IIT Bombay) Web courseware
3
https://www.me.iitb.ac.in/~ramesh/courses/ME423/me423.html
Design of Machine elements(NPTEL Tutorials)
4
https://youtube.com/playlist?list=PLfdm9m79os6LxsLyBxQP2PjF-brqYkg_F&feature=shared
 SEMESTER S3

FLUID AND THERMAL SCIENCES

Course Code PCPET303 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3-1-0-0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 4 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) None Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. To familiarize the fundamental concepts and methods of fluid mechanics and thermal
science

2. To equip students to apply fluid mechanics and thermal science concepts for
practical applications
SYLLABUS

Module Syllabus Description Contact

No. Hours
Physical properties of fluids, density, specific weight, vapour pressure,
Newton’s law of viscosity. Newtonian and non-Newtonian fluids.
11
1 Fluid Statics: Fluid pressure, Forces on solid surfaces, Buoyant forces.

Kinematics of Fluid Flow: Equations for acceleration, Continuity equation,

Irrotational and rotational flow, Potential and stream functions.
Dynamics of Fluid Flow: Euler and Bernoulli’s theorems, Impulse
momentum theory, Applications of energy and momentum equations.

Pipe Flow Systems: Darcy-Weisbach equation, Energy losses in pipelines,

11
Minor losses.
2

Thermodynamics: Thermodynamic System and Control Volume,

Surrounding, Boundaries, Thermodynamic properties, Process, Cycle,
Thermodynamic Equilibrium, Quasi–static Process, State, Point and Path
function. Zeroth Law of Thermodynamics.
 Energy and Work:Pdv work and other types of work transfer, free expansion
work, heat and heat capacity. First law of Thermodynamics and applications
- Enthalpy- specific heats. Second Law of Thermodynamics, Thermal
Reservoir, Heat Engine, Heat pump – Kelvin- Planck and Clausius 11
Statements, Reversibility, Irreversible Process, Carnot’s theorem and its
3
corollaries, Absolute Thermodynamic Temperature scale. Clausius
Inequality, Entropy- Entropy changes in various thermodynamic processes,
principle of increase of entropy and its applications, Entropy generation,
Third law of thermodynamics.

Overview of heat transfer mechanisms: Introductory concepts of conduction,

convection, radiation. Fourier’s law of heat conduction. Newton’s law of
cooling. Conduction: Steady state heat conduction in plane walls, Multi layer
walls. Heat conduction in cylinders. Thermal resistance concept. Critical
radius of insulation. Heat transfer from find surfaces. Fin efficiency, Fin
effectiveness.
11
Convection: Free and forced convection. Physical mechanism of forced
4
convection, convection heat transfer coefficient, Dimensionless numbers-
Nusselt number, Velocity boundary layer, Laminar and turbulent flows,
Reynolds number, Thermal boundary layer, Prandl number. Natural
convection ,Grashof number.

Thermal radiation: black body radiation – radiation properties – laws of

thermal radiation, Stefan – Boltzman law, Wein’s displacement law, black
and grey surfaces. View factor.

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40
 End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

● 2 Questions from each ● Each question carries 9 marks.
module. ● Two questions will be given from each module, out
● Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
60
carrying 3 marks ● Each question can have a maximum of 3
subdivisions.
(8x3 =24 marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)

Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s Knowledge
Course Outcomes
Level (KL)
Demonstrate the fundamental concepts of fluid mechanics, including
CO1 pressure, hydrostatics, and buoyancy K2

Solve fluid systems and design problems; Explain basic thermodynamics

CO2 concepts K3

Apply the principles of heat transfer, thermodynamics, and energy

CO3 K3
conversion
CO4 Make use of thermal systems and design solutions K3
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
3 3 3 - - - - - - - - 2
CO1
3 3 3 - - - - - - - - 2
CO2
3 3 3 - - - - - - - - 2
CO3
3 3 3 - - - - - - - - 2
CO4
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation
 Text Books
Edition and
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s Name of the Publisher
Year
Engineering McGraw Hill
1 P. K Nag 6th Ed. 2017
Thermodynamics Education

McGraw Hill 3rd Ed.

2 Heat and Mass Transfer P. K Nag
Education 2011

3 Fluid Mechanics R. K. Bansal Laxmi Publications 2ndEd. 2020

Reference Books
Name of the Edition and
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher Year
Thermodynamics: An 9th Ed. 2019
1 Yunus A Cengel Michael A Boles
Engineering Approach
9th Ed. 2017
2 Heat Transfer Holman, J.P. Tata Mc Graw Hill
2ndEd. 2022
3 Fluid Mechanics R.C Hibbeler Pearson education
 SEMESTER S3

MATERIAL SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

Course Code PBPET304 CIE Marks 60

Teaching Hours/Week
4 ESE Marks 40
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3:0:0:1 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) None Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. To familiarizeabout the structure, and properties, of various engineering materials.

2. To enable students for identification of appropriate material for a given engineering
application.
.
SYLLABUS

Module Syllabus Description Contact

No. Hours
Introduction to materials- Classification- Crystal Structures -SC, BCC,
FCC, HCP structures, APF - theoretical density simple problems – Miller
Indices: - crystal plane and direction - Modes of plastic deformation: - Slip
and twinning -Schmid's law - Crystal Imperfections, Point Defects- Line
Defects-Surface Defects-Bulk Defects.

1 Critical nucleus size and Critical Free energy- Nucleation-Homogeneous 11

and Heterogeneous Nucleation- Growth - Single crystal -Polycrystalline
Materials - Basic principles of solidification of metals and alloys. Growth
of crystals- Planar growth – dendritic growth – Solidification time -
Cooling curves - non-crystalline solids- Glass Transition Temperature.
Effects of grain size, Hall - Petch theory, simple problems.
Diffusion in solids, Fick’s laws, mechanisms, applications of diffusion in
mechanical engineering, simple problems.
Solutions-Hume Rothery Rules, Phase Diagrams: Phase Rule –Unary
2 11
System- Binary Phase diagrams- Isomorphous systems- Congruent phase
diagrams - Tie Line- Lever Rule- Eutectic, Peritectic, Eutectoid and
Peritectoid reactions.
 Typical Phase diagrams –Fe-Fe3C system- Cu-Zn System – Pb-Sn system-
Ag-Pt System-Iron-Iron carbide Equilibrium Diagram-perform phase
equilibrium calculation and construction of phase diagram.
Recovery recrystallization and grain growth, cold and hot working-
Bauschinger effect.
Heat treatment: - Definition and necessity – TTT for a eutectoid iron–
carbon alloy, CCT diagram, applications - annealing, normalizing,
hardening, spheroidizing. Tempering: - Austempering, martempering and
Aus forming. Hardenability, Jominy end quench test, applications- Surface

3 hardening methods. Alloy steels: effect of alloying elements on properties 11

of steel, strengthening mechanisms.
Characteristics of fatigue failure, fatigue tests, S-N curve.
Fracture: – Brittle and ductile fracture – Griffith theory of brittle fracture –
Stress concentration, stress raiser – Effect of plastic deformation on crack
propagation – trans-granular, inter-granular fracture. Ductile to brittle
transition temperature (DBTT).
Introduction to composite materials along with its basic requirements and
classification; metal matrix (MM), polymer Matrix (PM) and ceramic
matrix (CM) composites, Secondary processing and joining of various
composite materials.
Introduction to Nanomaterials: Classification of nanostructures, nanoscale

4 architecture, fundamental structure and their properties. 11

Smart Materials: Piezoelectric Materials, Electrostrictive Materials,
Magnetostrictive Materials, Magnetoelectric Materials.
Magnetorheological Fluids, Electrorheological Fluids, Shape Memory
Materials, Optic Fibers. Applications of smart materials.

Suggestion on Project Topics

● Selection of biodegradable materials for packing industries.
● Investigation of the mechanical properties of graphene composites.
● Development of coatings for corrosion resistance on steel surfaces.
● Fabrication and testing of shape memory alloys for applications in actuators.
● Analysis of the mechanical performance of natural fiber-reinforced composites.
● Design and testing of hydrogels that respond to environmental stimuli.
 ● Evaluation of the mechanical properties of 3D printed materials versus traditional
manufacturing methods.
● Development of novel materials for battery applications, such as lithium-ion batteries.
● Investigation of surface treatments to improve wear resistance in materials.
● Analysis of the feasibility of recycling metal waste in manufacturing processes.

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 60 marks, ESE: 40 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Attendance Project Internal Ex-1 Internal Ex-2 Total

5 30 12.5 12.5 60

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

● 2 Questions from each 2 questions will be given from each module, out of
module. which 1 question should be answered. Each question
● Total of 8 Questions, can have a maximum of 2 sub divisions. Each question 40
each carrying 2 marks carries 6 marks.
(8x2 =16 marks) (4x6 = 24 marks)
Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcomes Knowledge
Level (KL)
Analyze crystal structures for identifying the crystal defects, and
CO1 K4
differentiate homogeneous and heterogeneous nucleation.
Explain Hume Rothery rules and understand the equilibrium diagram
CO2 K2
and invariant reactions.
Explain TTT diagram, heat treatment processes and differentiate cold
CO3 K2
and hot working.
CO4 Identify advanced materials and their applications. K2
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create
 CO-PO Mapping Table:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 2 - 2 3 - - - - - - 3

CO2 3 2 - 2 2 - - - - - - 3

CO3 3 3 - 3 2 - - - - - - 3

CO4 3 3 - 3 3 - - - - - - 3

Text Books
Edition and
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s Name of the Publisher
Year
Material Science and 10th Ed.
1 Callister William. D John Wiley,
Engineering 2014
2 Elements of Material Science Van Vlack Addison Wesley 6th Ed. 1989

Reference Books
Edition and
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s Name of the Publisher
Year
J.C. Anderson,
Keith D. Leaver, 5th Ed.
1 Material Science for Engineers CRC Press
Rees D. Rawlings, 2005
Patrick S. Leevers
Fundamentals of Materials
2nd Ed.
2 Science and Engineering: An Callister, William D. Jr. John Wiley and Sons
2003
Integrated Approach
Material Science and 5th Ed.
3 Raghavan V Prentice Hall
Engineering 2004
Nanoscale Science and 1st Ed.
4 Robert K, Ian H, Mark G John Wiley & sons Ltd
Technology 2005
Heat Treatment Principles and 3rd Ed.
5 Rajan T. V PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd.
Techniques 2010
 Video Links
Module
Link ID
No.
1 https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/113/102/113102080/
2 https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/113/102/113102080/
3 https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/113/102/113102080/
https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/112/104/112104229/
4 https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/113/104/113104102/
https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/112/104/112104251/

PBL Course Elements

L: Lecture R: Project (1 Hr.), 2 Faculty Members

(3 Hrs.) Tutorial Practical Presentation
Simulation/ Presentation
Lecture delivery Project identification Laboratory Work/ (Progress and Final
Workshops Presentations)
Group discussion Project Analysis Data Collection Evaluation
Question answer Project Milestone Reviews,
Sessions/ Analytical thinking and Feedback,
Testing
Brainstorming self-learning Project reformation (If
Sessions required)
Poster Presentation/
Guest Speakers
Case Study/ Field Video Presentation: Students
(Industry Prototyping
Survey Report present their results in a 2 to 5
Experts)
minutes video

Assessment and Evaluation for Project Activity

Sl. No Evaluation for Allotted

Marks
1 Project Planning and Proposal 5
2 Contribution in Progress Presentations and Question Answer 4
Sessions
3 Involvement in the project work and Team Work 3
4 Execution and Implementation 10
5 Final Presentations 5
6 Project Quality, Innovation and Creativity 3
Total 30

1. Project Planning and Proposal (5 Marks)

● Clarity and feasibility of the project plan

● Research and background understanding
● Defined objectives and methodology
2. Contribution in Progress Presentation and Question Answer Sessions (4 Marks)

● Individual contribution to the presentation

● Effectiveness in answering questions and handling feedback

3. Involvement in the Project Work and Team Work (3 Marks)

● Active participation and individual contribution

● Teamwork and collaboration

4. Execution and Implementation (10 Marks)

● Adherence to the project timeline and milestones

● Application of theoretical knowledge and problem-solving
● Final Result

5. Final Presentation (5 Marks)

● Quality and clarity of the overall presentation

● Individual contribution to the presentation
● Effectiveness in answering questions

6. Project Quality, Innovation, and Creativity (3 Marks)

● Overall quality and technical excellence of the project

● Innovation and originality in the project
● Creativity in solutions and approaches
 SEMESTER S3

INTRODUCTION TO ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE AND DATA

SCIENCE

Course Code GNEST305 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:1:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 4 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) None Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. Demonstrate a solid understanding of advanced linear algebra concepts, machine learning

algorithms and statistical analysis techniques relevant to engineering applications, principles
and algorithms.
2. Apply theoretical concepts to solve practical engineering problems, analyze data to extract
meaningful insights, and implement appropriate mathematical and computational techniques
for AI and data science applications.

SYLLABUS
Module Syllabus Description Contact
No. Hours
Introduction to AI and Machine Learning: Basics of Machine Learning -
types of Machine Learning systems-challenges in ML- Supervised learning
model example- regression models- Classification model example- Logistic
1 regression-unsupervised model example- K-means clustering. Artificial
11
Neural Network- Perceptron- Universal Approximation Theorem (statement
only)- Multi-Layer Perceptron- Deep Neural Network- demonstration of
regression and classification problems using MLP.(Text-2)

Mathematical Foundations of AI and Data science: Role of linear algebra

2
in Data representation and analysis – Matrix decomposition- Singular Value 11
 Decomposition (SVD)- Spectral decomposition- Dimensionality reduction
technique-Principal Component Analysis (PCA). (Text-1)
Applied Probability and Statistics for AI and Data Science: Basics of
probability-random variables and statistical measures - rules in probability-
Bayes theorem and its applications- statistical estimation-Maximum
3 11
Likelihood Estimator (MLE) - statistical summaries- Correlation analysis-
linear correlation (direct problems only)- regression analysis- linear
regression (using least square method) (Text book 4 )
Basics of Data Science: Benefits of data science-use of statistics and
Machine Learning in Data Science- data science process - applications of
Machine Learning in Data Science- modelling process- demonstration of ML
applications in data science- Big Data and Data Science. (For visualization
4
the software tools like Tableau, PowerBI, R or Python can be used. For 11
Machine Learning implementation, Python, MATLAB or R can be
used.)(Text book-5)

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks , ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40
 End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one full
question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

 2 Questions from each  Each question carries 9 marks.
module.  Two questions will be given from each module, out
 Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
60
carrying 3 marks  Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub
divisions.
(8x3 =24marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)
Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)

Apply the concept of machine learning algorithms including neural K3

CO1 networks and supervised/unsupervised learning techniques for
engineering applications.
Apply advanced mathematical concepts such as matrix operations, K3
CO2 singular values, and principal component analysis to analyze and solve
engineering problems.
Analyze and interpret data using statistical methods including K3
CO3 descriptive statistics, correlation, and regression analysis to derive
meaningful insights and make informed decisions.
Integrate statistical approaches and machine learning techniques to K3
CO4
ensure practically feasible solutions in engineering contexts.
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 3 3 3

CO2 3 3 3 3

CO3 3 3 3 3

CO4 3 3 3 3
 Text Books
Name of the Name of the Edition and
Sl. No Title of the Book
Author/s Publisher Year
Wellesley-Cambridge 6th edition,
1 Introduction to Linear Algebra Gilbert Strang
Press 2023
Hands-on machine learning with 2nd
2 Scikit-Learn, Keras, and AurélienGéron O'Reilly Media, Inc.
edition,2022
TensorFlow
Deisenroth, Marc
Mathematics for machine Cambridge University 1st edition.
3 Peter, A. Aldo Faisal,
learning Press 2020
and Cheng Soon Ong
Fundamentals of mathematical Gupta, S. C., and V. 9th edition,
4 Sultan Chand & Sons
statistics K. Kapoor 2020
Introducing data science: big data, Cielen, Davy, and 1st edition,
5 machine learning, and more, Simon and Schuster
Arno Meysman 2016
using Python tools

Reference Books

Kotu,
Data science: concepts and Vijay, and
1 Morgan Kaufmann 2nd edition, 2018
practice Bala
Deshpande
Carlos
Probability and Statistics for Center for Data
2 Fernandez- 1st edition, 2017
Data Science Science in NYU
Granda
Avrim Blum,
John
Cambridge University
3 Foundations of Data Science Hopcroft, 1st edition, 2020
Press
and Ravi
Kannan
James D.
4 Statistics For Data Science Packt Publishing 1st edition, 2019
Miller
Michael J.
Probability and Statistics - Evans and
5 The Science of Uncertainty Jeffrey S.
University of Toronto 1st edition, 2009
Rosenthal
chrome-
An Introduction to the extension://efaidnbmn
Joseph C. Preliminary
6 Science of Statistics: From nnibpcajpcglclefindm
Watkins Edition.
Theory to Implementation kaj/https://www.math.
arizo
 Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

Module No. Link ID

1 https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/106/106/106106198/

https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/106/106/106106198/
https://ocw.mit.edu/courses/18-06-linear-algebra-spring-2010/resources/lecture-29-singular-
2 value-decomposition/

https://ocw.mit.edu/courses/18-650-statistics-for-applications-fall-2016/resources/lecture-19-
3
video/

4 https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/106/106/106106198/
 SEMESTER S3/S4

ECONOMICS FOR ENGINEERS

(Common to All Branches)

Course Code UCHUT346 CIE Marks 50

Teaching Hours/Week
2:0:0:0 ESE Marks 50
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 2 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) None Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. Understanding of finance and costing for engineering operation, budgetary planning and
control
2. Provide fundamental concept of micro and macroeconomics related to engineering industry
3. Deliver the basic concepts of Value Engineering.

SYLLABUS
Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours

Basic Economics Concepts - Basic economic problems – Production

Possibility Curve – Utility – Law of diminishing marginal utility – Law of
Demand - Law of supply – Elasticity - measurement of elasticity and its
1 applications – Equilibrium- Changes in demand and supply and its effects
6

Production function - Law of variable proportion – Economies of Scale –

Internal and External Economies – Cobb-Douglas Production Function

Cost concepts – Social cost, private cost – Explicit and implicit cost – Sunk
cost - Opportunity cost - short run cost curves - Revenue concepts
2 Firms and their objectives – Types of firms – Markets - Perfect Competition
6
– Monopoly - Monopolistic Competition - Oligopoly (features and
equilibrium of a firm)

3 6
Monetary System – Money – Functions - Central Banking –Inflation -
 Causes and Effects – Measures to Control Inflation - Monetary and Fiscal
policies – Deflation
Taxation – Direct and Indirect taxes (merits and demerits) - GST
National income – Concepts - Circular Flow – Methods of Estimation and
Difficulties - Stock Market – Functions- Problems faced by the Indian stock
market-Demat Account and Trading Account – Stock market Indicators-
SENSEX and NIFTY

Value Analysis and value Engineering - Cost Value, Exchange Value, Use
Value, Esteem Value - Aims, Advantages and Application areas of Value
4 Engineering - Value Engineering Procedure - Break-even Analysis - Cost-
6
Benefit Analysis - Capital Budgeting - Process planning

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 50 marks , ESE: 50 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/ Case
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
study/Microproject
(Written) (Written )

10 15 12.5 12.5 50

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one full
question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

● Minimum 1 and 2 questions will be given from each module, out of which
Maximum 2 Questions 1 question should be answered. Each question can have a
from each module. maximum of 2 sub divisions. Each question carries 8
● Total of 6 Questions, marks. 50
each carrying 3 marks
(6x3 =18marks) (4x8 = 32 marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)

Understand the fundamentals of various economic issues using laws and K2

CO1
learn the concepts of demand, supply, elasticity and production function.
Develop decision making capability by applying concepts relating to K3
CO2 costs and revenue, and acquire knowledge regarding the functioning of
firms in different market situations.
Outline the macroeconomic principles of monetary and fiscal systems, K2
CO3
national income and stock market.
Make use of the possibilities of value analysis and engineering, and K3
CO4 solve simple business problems using break even analysis, cost benefit
analysis and capital budgeting techniques.
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 - - - - - 1 - - - - 1 -

CO2 - - - - - 1 1 - - - 1 -

CO3 - - - - 1 - - - - - 2 -

CO4 - - - - 1 1 - - - - 2 -

Text Books
Edition and
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s Name of the Publisher
Year
Geetika, Piyali Ghosh
1 Managerial Economics Tata McGraw Hill, 2015
and Chodhury

H. G. Thuesen, W. J.
2 PHI 1966
Engineering Economy Fabrycky

3 R. Paneerselvam PHI 2012

Engineering Economics
 Reference Books
Edition and
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s Name of the Publisher
Year
Leland Blank P.E,
1 Mc Graw Hill 7TH Edition
Engineering Economy Anthony Tarquin P. E.

2 Indian Financial System Khan M. Y. Tata McGraw Hill 2011

Engineering Economics and Donald G. Newman,

3 Engg. Press, Texas 2002
analysis Jerome P. Lavelle

Contemporary Engineering Prentice Hall of India

4 Chan S. Park 2001
Economics Ltd
 SEMESTER S3/S4

ENGINEERING ETHICS AND SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT

Course Code UCHUT347 CIE Marks 50

Teaching Hours/Week
2:0:0:0 ESE Marks 50
(L: T:P: R)
2
Credits Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.
None
Prerequisites (if any) Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. Equip with the knowledge and skills to make ethical decisions and implement gender-
sensitive practices in their professional lives.
2. Develop a holistic and comprehensive interdisciplinary approach to understanding
engineering ethics principles from a perspective of environment protection and
sustainable development.
3. Develop the ability to find strategies for implementing sustainable engineering solutions.

SYLLABUS
Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Fundamentals of ethics - Personal vs. professional ethics, Civic
Virtue, Respect for others, Profession and Professionalism,
Ingenuity, diligence and responsibility, Integrity in design,
development, and research domains, Plagiarism, a balanced outlook
on law - challenges - case studies, Technology and digital
1 6
revolution-Data, information, and knowledge, Cybertrust and
cybersecurity, Data collection & management, High technologies:
connecting people and places-accessibility and social impacts,
Managing conflict, Collective bargaining, Confidentiality, Role of
confidentiality in moral integrity, Codes of Ethics.
 Basic concepts in Gender Studies - sex, gender, sexuality, gender
spectrum: beyond the binary, gender identity, gender expression,
gender stereotypes, Gender disparity and discrimination in
education, employment and everyday life, History of women in
Science & Technology, Gendered technologies & innovations, Ethical
values and practices in connection with gender - equity, diversity &
gender justice, Gender policy and women/transgender
empowerment initiatives.
Introduction to Environmental Ethics: Definition, importance and
historical development of environmental ethics, key philosophical
theories (anthropocentrism, biocentrism, ecocentrism). Sustainable
Engineering Principles: Definition and scope, triple bottom line
(economic, social and environmental sustainability), life cycle analysis
and sustainability metrics. Ecosystems and Biodiversity: Basics of
2 6
ecosystems and their functions, Importance of biodiversity and its
conservation, Human impact on ecosystems and biodiversity loss, An
overview of various ecosystems in Kerala/India, and its significance.
Landscape and Urban Ecology: Principles of landscape ecology,
Urbanization and its environmental impact, Sustainable urban
planning and green infrastructure.
Hydrology and Water Management: Basics of hydrology and water
cycle, Water scarcity and pollution issues, Sustainable water
management practices, Environmental flow, disruptions and disasters.
Zero Waste Concepts and Practices: Definition of zero waste and its
principles, Strategies for waste reduction, reuse, reduce and recycling,

3 Case studies of successful zero waste initiatives. Circular Economy 6

and Degrowth: Introduction to the circular economy model,
Differences between linear and circular economies, degrowth
principles, Strategies for implementing circular economy practices and
degrowth principles in engineering. Mobility and Sustainable
Transportation: Impacts of transportation on the environment and
 climate, Basic tenets of a Sustainable Transportation design,
Sustainable urban mobility solutions, Integrated mobility systems, E-
Mobility, Existing and upcoming models of sustainable mobility
solutions.
Renewable Energy and Sustainable Technologies: Overview of
renewable energy sources (solar, wind, hydro, biomass), Sustainable
technologies in energy production and consumption, Challenges and
opportunities in renewable energy adoption. Climate Change and
Engineering Solutions: Basics of climate change science, Impact of
climate change on natural and human systems, Kerala/India and the
Climate crisis, Engineering solutions to mitigate, adapt and build

4 resilience to climate change. Environmental Policies and 6

Regulations: Overview of key environmental policies and regulations
(national and international), Role of engineers in policy
implementation and compliance, Ethical considerations in
environmental policy-making. Case Studies and Future Directions:
Analysis of real-world case studies, Emerging trends and future
directions in environmental ethics and sustainability, Discussion on
the role of engineers in promoting a sustainable future.

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 50 marks , ESE: 50)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Continuous internal evaluation will be based on individual and group activities undertaken
throughout the course and the portfolio created documenting their work and learning. The
portfolio will include reflections, project reports, case studies, and all other relevant materials.
● The students should be grouped into groups of size 4 to 6 at the beginning of the
semester. These groups can be the same ones they have formed in the previous semester.
● Activities are to be distributed between 2 class hours and 3 Self-study hours.
 ● The portfolio and reflective journal should be carried forward and displayed during the
7th Semester Seminar course as a part of the experience sharing regarding the skills
developed through various courses.

Sl. Item Particulars Group Marks

No. /Indivi
dual
(G/I)
1 Reflective Weekly entries reflecting on what was learned, I 5
Journal personal insights, and how it can be applied to local
contexts.
2 Micro project 1 a) Perform an Engineering Ethics Case Study G 8
analysis and prepare a report
(Detailed 1 b) Conduct a literature survey on ‘Code of Ethics
documentatio for Engineers’ and prepare a sample code of
n of the ethics
project, 2. Listen to a TED talk on a Gender-related topic, do G 5
including a literature survey on that topic and make a report
methodologie citing the relevant papers with a specific analysis
s, findings, of the Kerala context
and 3. Undertake a project study based on the concepts G 12
reflections) of sustainable development* - Module II, Module
III & Module IV
3 Activities 2. One activity* each from Module II, Module III & G 15
Module IV
4 Final A comprehensive presentation summarising the key G 5
Presentation takeaways from the course, personal reflections, and
proposed future actions based on the learnings.
Total Marks 50

*Can be taken from the given sample activities/projects

Evaluation Criteria:
● Depth of Analysis: Quality and depth of reflections and analysis in project reports
and case studies.
● Application of Concepts: Ability to apply course concepts to real-world problems
and local contexts.
● Creativity: Innovative approaches and creative solutions proposed in projects and
reflections.
● Presentation Skills: Clarity, coherence, and professionalism in the final
presentation.
 Course Outcomes (COs)
At the end of the course students should be able to:
Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
Develop the ability to apply the principles of engineering ethics K3
CO1
in their professional life.
Develop the ability to exercise gender-sensitive practices in their K4
CO2
professional lives
Develop the ability to explore contemporary environmental K5
CO3
issues and sustainable practices.
Develop the ability to analyse the role of engineers in promoting K4
CO4
sustainability and climate resilience.
Develop interest and skills in addressing pertinent environmental K3
CO5 and climate-related challenges through a sustainable engineering
approach.
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table:

PO1 PO1 PO1

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9
0 1 2
CO1 3 2 3 3 2 2
CO2 1 3 2 3 3 2 2
CO3 3 3 2 3 2 2
CO4 1 3 3 2 3 2 2
CO5 3 3 2 3 2 2
 Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
2nd
Cambridge
Ethics in Engineering edition &
1 Caroline Whitbeck University Press &
Practice and Research August
Assessment
2011
Cambridge
Virtue Ethics and Professional November
2 Justin Oakley University Press &
Roles 2006
Assessment
2nd
Cambridge
edition &
3 Sustainability Science Bert J. M. de Vries University Press &
December
Assessment
2023
Cambridge
Sustainable Engineering
4 Bhavik R. Bakshi, University Press & 2019
Principles and Practice
Assessmen
M Govindarajan, S PHI Learning
5 Engineering Ethics Natarajan and V S Private Ltd, New 2012
Senthil Kumar Delhi
New age
Professional ethics and human
6 values
RS Naagarazan international (P) 2006.
limited New Delhi
Tata McGraw Hill
Mike W Martin and 4" edition,
7 Ethics in Engineering Publishing Company
Roland Schinzinger, 2014
Pvt Ltd, New Delhi

Suggested Activities/Projects:
Module-II

● Write a reflection on a local environmental issue (e.g., plastic waste in Kerala backwaters or
oceans) from different ethical perspectives (anthropocentric, biocentric, ecocentric).
● Write a life cycle analysis report of a common product used in Kerala (e.g., a coconut, bamboo
or rubber-based product) and present findings on its sustainability.
● Create a sustainability report for a local business, assessing its environmental, social, and
economic impacts
● Presentation on biodiversity in a nearby area (e.g., a local park, a wetland, mangroves, college
campus etc) and propose conservation strategies to protect it.
● Develop a conservation plan for an endangered species found in Kerala.
● Analyze the green spaces in a local urban area and propose a plan to enhance urban ecology
using native plants and sustainable design.
● Create a model of a sustainable urban landscape for a chosen locality in Kerala.
Module-III

● Study a local water body (e.g., a river or lake) for signs of pollution or natural flow disruption
and suggest sustainable management and restoration practices.
● Analyse the effectiveness of water management in the college campus and propose
improvements - calculate the water footprint, how to reduce the footprint, how to increase supply
through rainwater harvesting, and how to decrease the supply-demand ratio
● Implement a zero waste initiative on the college campus for one week and document the
challenges and outcomes.
● Develop a waste audit report for the campus. Suggest a plan for a zero-waste approach.
● Create a circular economy model for a common product used in Kerala (e.g., coconut oil, cloth
etc).
● Design a product or service based on circular economy and degrowth principles and present a
business plan.
● Develop a plan to improve pedestrian and cycling infrastructure in a chosen locality in Kerala
Module-IV

● Evaluate the potential for installing solar panels on the college campus including cost-benefit
analysis and feasibility study.
● Analyse the energy consumption patterns of the college campus and propose sustainable
alternatives to reduce consumption - What gadgets are being used? How can we reduce demand
using energy-saving gadgets?
● Analyse a local infrastructure project for its climate resilience and suggest improvements.
● Analyse a specific environmental regulation in India (e.g., Coastal Regulation Zone) and its
impact on local communities and ecosystems.
● Research and present a case study of a successful sustainable engineering project in Kerala/India
(e.g., sustainable building design, water management project, infrastructure project).
● Research and present a case study of an unsustainable engineering project in Kerala/India
highlighting design and implementation faults and possible corrections/alternatives (e.g., a
housing complex with water logging, a water management project causing frequent floods,
infrastructure project that affects surrounding landscapes or ecosystems).
 SEMESTER S3

COMPUTER AIDED DESIGN LAB

Course Code PCPEL307 CIE Marks 50

Teaching Hours/Week
0:0:3:0 ESE Marks 50
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 2 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) None Course Type Lab

Course Objectives:

1. To familiarize the basic concepts to drawing, edit, dimension, hatching etc. to develop 2D
& 3D Modelling.
2. To enable students to create 3D modelling, Assembling, modification & manipulation
along with detailing.

Expt.
Experiments (Minimum of 10 experiments should be completed)
No.
1 Simple 2D models using drawing and editing tools. (foundation bolts)
2 Advanced 2D models using drawing and editing tools. (cotter joint with bill of materials)
3 Advanced 2D models using drawing and editing tools. (knuckle joint with bill of
materials)
4 Advanced 2D models using drawing and editing tools. (flanged coupling with bill of
materials)
5 Advanced 2D models using drawing and editing tools. (flexible coupling with bill of
materials)
6 Isometric drawings using 2D modelling.
7 Simple Engineering parts using 3D modelling software
8 3D assembly (Plummer block)
9 3D assembly (Connecting rod)
10 3D assembly (Machine vice)
11 3D assembly (Screw jack)
12 3D assembly (Lathe tailstock)
 Course Assessment Method
(CIE: 50 marks, ESE: 50 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Preparation/Pre-Lab Work experiments,

Viva and Timely Internal
Attendance Total
completion of Lab Reports / Record Examination
(Continuous Assessment)
5 25 20 50

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE):

Procedure/ Conduct of experiment/ Result with valid

Preparatory Execution of work/ inference/ Viva
Record Total
work/Design/ troubleshooting/ Quality of voce
Algorithm Programming Output
10 15 10 10 5 50

● Submission of Record: Students shall be allowed for the end semester examination only upon
submitting the duly certified record.

● Endorsement by External Examiner: The external examiner shall endorse the record

Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcomes Knowledge
Level (KL)
Develop 2D and 3D models using basic tools in CAD software .
CO1 K2
Familiarize with various commands in the tools box to develop 2D & 3D K3
CO2
models.
K3
CO3 Build, modify and manipulate 3D assemblies of machine components .
K3
CO4 Develop 2D drafting from 3D part models and their assemblies.
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create
 CO- PO Mapping (Mapping of Course Outcomes with Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
3 2 2 2 3 - - - 3 3 - 3
CO1
3 2 2 2 3 - - - 3 3 - 3
CO2
3 2 2 2 3 - - - 3 3 - 3
CO3
3 2 2 2 3 - - - 3 3 - 3
CO4
1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
1 P.I. Varghese & K.C.
Machine Drawing VIP Publishers 2015
John
2 23rd Ed.
AutoCAD 2017 Prof. Sham Tickoo Cad cim Technologies
2016
3 Creo Parametric 2.0 for
Prof. Sham Tickoo Cad cim Technologies 2014
Designers

Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
1 50th Ed.
Machine Drawing Bhat N. D., Panchal Charotar Pub. House
2000.
New age
2 Narayana K. L., 5th Ed.
Machine Drawing international
Kannaiah P. 2000
Publishers
3 A Textbook of Machine K. Kataria and Sons, 18th Ed.
Gill P. S.,
Drawing New Delhi 2008

Continuous Assessment (25 Marks)

1. Preparation and Pre-Lab Work (7 Marks)

● Pre-Lab Assignments: Assessment of pre-lab assignments or quizzes that test understanding

of the upcoming experiment.
● Understanding of Theory: Evaluation based on students’ preparation and understanding of the
theoretical background related to the experiments.
 2. Conduct of Experiments (7 Marks)

● Procedure and Execution: Adherence to correct procedures, accurate execution of

experiments, and following safety protocols.
● Skill Proficiency: Proficiency in handling equipment, accuracy in observations, and
troubleshooting skills during the experiments.
● Teamwork: Collaboration and participation in group experiments.

3. Lab Reports and Record Keeping (6 Marks)

● Quality of Reports: Clarity, completeness and accuracy of lab reports. Proper documentation
of experiments, data analysis and conclusions.
● Timely Submission: Adhering to deadlines for submitting lab reports/rough record and
maintaining a well-organized fair record.

4. Viva Voce (5 Marks)

● Oral Examination: Ability to explain the experiment, results and underlying principles
during a viva voce session.

Final Marks Averaging: The final marks for preparation, conduct of experiments, viva,
and record are the average of all the specified experiments in the syllabus.

Evaluation Pattern for End Semester Examination (50 Marks)

1. Procedure/Preliminary Work/Design/Algorithm (10 Marks)

● Procedure Understanding and Description: Clarity in explaining the procedure and

understanding each step involved.
● Preliminary Work and Planning: Thoroughness in planning and organizing
materials/equipment.
● Algorithm Development: Correctness and efficiency of the algorithm related to the
experiment.
● Creativity and logic in algorithm or experimental design.

2. Conduct of Experiment/Execution of Work/Programming (15 Marks)

● Setup and Execution: Proper setup and accurate execution of the experiment or programming
task.
3. Result with Valid Inference/Quality of Output (10 Marks)

● Accuracy of Results: Precision and correctness of the obtained results.

● Analysis and Interpretation: Validity of inferences drawn from the experiment or quality of
program output.

4. Viva Voce (10 Marks)

● Ability to explain the experiment, procedure results and answer related questions
● Proficiency in answering questions related to theoretical and practical aspects of the subject.

5. Record (5 Marks)

● Completeness, clarity, and accuracy of the lab record submitted

 SEMESTER S3

CONTINUUM MECHANICS LAB

Course Code PCPEL308 CIE Marks 50

Teaching Hours/Week (L:

0:0:3:0 ESE Marks 50
T:P: R)

Credits 2 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

None
Prerequisites (if any) Course Type Lab

Course Objectives:

1. To familiarize the physical properties of fluids, including density, viscosity, and

surface tension, and their impact on fluid flow in different scenarios with hands-on
training.
2. To familiarize the mechanical properties of various materials, such as tensile strength,
compressive strength, hardness, and toughness, through standard testing methods.

Expt.
Experiments (Minimum 10 experiments should be completed)
No.
1 Tension test on Mild Steel using Universal Testing Machine and Extensometers.
2 Tests on springs (Open and Close coiled).

3 Hardness test (Brinell, Vickers and Rockwell).

4 Impact test (Izod and Charpy).

5
Torsion test on Mild Steel rods.
6 Strut test (Column buckling experiment).
7 Determination of moment of inertia of rotating bodies.
8
Fatigue life ( endurance) test.
9 Verification of Bernoulli’s theorem.
10 Calibration of Venturi meter.
11 Calibration of Orifice meter.
12 Estimation of hydraulic coefficients of orifices and mouth pieces.
13 Calibration of triangular and rectangular notches.
14 Determination of loss of head in a pipeline.
15 Determination of friction factor for a given pipe line.
16 Determination of Metacentric height.
 Course Assessment Method
(CIE: 50 marks, ESE: 50 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Preparation/Pre-Lab Work experiments,

Viva and Timely Internal
Attendance Total
completion of Lab Reports / Record Examination
(Continuous Assessment)
5 25 20 50

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE):

Procedure/ Conduct of experiment/ Result with valid

Preparatory Execution of work/ inference/ Viva
Record Total
work/Design/ troubleshooting/ Quality of Voce
Algorithm Programming Output
10 15 10 10 5 50

● Submission of Record: Students shall be allowed for the end semester examination only upon
submitting the duly certified record.

● Endorsement by External Examiner: The external examiner shall endorse the record

Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcomes Knowledge
Level (KL)
CO1 Determine the strength of materials upon normal external loads. K3
Identify the mechanical behaviour of materials under different loading
CO2 K3
conditions
CO3 Evaluate the performance of different instruments and measurement devices. K3
CO4 Determine the hydraulic parameters of different flow measurement devices. K3
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create
 CO- PO Mapping (Mapping of Course Outcomes with Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
3 3 3 1 - 1 - - 2 2 - 2
CO1
3 3 3 2 - 1 - - 2 2 - 2
CO2
3 3 3 - - 1 - - 2 2 - 2
CO3
3 3 3 - - 1 - - 2 2 - 2
CO4
1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
1 McGraw Hill 3rd Ed.
Strength of Materials S. S. Rattan
publishers 2017
8th Ed.
2 Mechanics of Materials Ferdinand P. Beer, McGraw Hill 2020

3 R.K. Bansal 2nd Ed.

Fluid Mechanics Laxmi Publications
2020

Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
2nd
1 Mechanics of Materials Egor P. Popov Pearson Ed.2015

2 R.C Hibbeler 2nd Ed.

Fluid Mechanics Pearson education
2022

Continuous Assessment (25 Marks)

1. Preparation and Pre-Lab Work (7 Marks)

● Pre-Lab Assignments: Assessment of pre-lab assignments or quizzes that test understanding

of the upcoming experiment.
● Understanding of Theory: Evaluation based on students’ preparation and understanding of the
theoretical background related to the experiments.
 2. Conduct of Experiments (7 Marks)

● Procedure and Execution: Adherence to correct procedures, accurate execution of

experiments, and following safety protocols.
● Skill Proficiency: Proficiency in handling equipment, accuracy in observations, and
troubleshooting skills during the experiments.
● Teamwork: Collaboration and participation in group experiments.

3. Lab Reports and Record Keeping (6 Marks)

● Quality of Reports: Clarity, completeness and accuracy of lab reports. Proper documentation
of experiments, data analysis and conclusions.
● Timely Submission: Adhering to deadlines for submitting lab reports/rough record and
maintaining a well-organized fair record.

4. Viva Voce (5 Marks)

● Oral Examination: Ability to explain the experiment, results and underlying principles
during a viva voce session.

Final Marks Averaging: The final marks for preparation, conduct of experiments, viva,
and record are the average of all the specified experiments in the syllabus.

Evaluation Pattern for End Semester Examination (50 Marks)

1. Procedure/Preliminary Work/Design/Algorithm (10 Marks)

● Procedure Understanding and Description: Clarity in explaining the procedure and

understanding each step involved.
● Preliminary Work and Planning: Thoroughness in planning and organizing
materials/equipment.
● Algorithm Development: Correctness and efficiency of the algorithm related to the
experiment.
● Creativity and logic in algorithm or experimental design.

2. Conduct of Experiment/Execution of Work/Programming (15 Marks)

● Setup and Execution: Proper setup and accurate execution of the experiment or programming
task.
3. Result with Valid Inference/Quality of Output (10 Marks)

● Accuracy of Results: Precision and correctness of the obtained results.

● Analysis and Interpretation: Validity of inferences drawn from the experiment or quality of
program output.

4. Viva Voce (10 Marks)

● Ability to explain the experiment, procedure results and answer related questions
● Proficiency in answering questions related to theoretical and practical aspects of the subject.

5. Record (5 Marks)

● Completeness, clarity, and accuracy of the lab record submitted

 SEMESTER 4
PRODUCTION ENGINEERING
 SEMESTER S4

MATHEMATICS FOR PHYSICAL SCIENCE – 4

Course Code GCMAT401 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) Basic calculus. Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. To familiarize students with the foundations of probabilistic and statistical analysis mostly used
in varied applications in engineering and science.
2. To provide the students with the basics of various numerical methods to develop problem solving
skills used in various engineering disciplines.

SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Random variables, Discrete random variables and their probability
distributions, Cumulative distribution function, Expectation, Mean and
variance, Binomial distribution, Poisson distribution, Poisson
1 distribution as a limit of the binomial distribution, Joint pmf of two 9
discrete random variables, Marginal pmf, Independent random
variables, Expected value of a function of two discrete variables.
[Text 1: Relevant topics from sections 3.1 to 3.4, 3.6, 5.1, 5.2]
Continuous random variables and their probability distributions,
Cumulative distribution function, Expectation, Mean and variance,
2 9
Uniform, Normal and Exponential distributions, Joint pdf of two
Continuous random variables, Marginal pdf, Independent random
 variables, Expectation value of a function of two continuous variables.
[Text 1: Relevant topics from sections 3.1, 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 4.4, 5.1, 5.2]

Confidence Intervals, Confidence Level, Confidence Intervals and

One-side confidence intervals for a Population Mean for large and
small samples (normal distribution and t-distribution), Hypotheses and
Test Procedures, Type I and Type II error, z Tests for Hypotheses
3 9
about a Population Mean (for large sample), t Test for Hypotheses
about a Population Mean (for small sample), Tests concerning a
population proportion for large and small samples.
[Text 1: Relevant topics from 7.1, 7.2, 7.3, 8.1, 8.2, 8.3, 8.4]
Newton-Raphson Method, Gauss Elimination Method ,Gauss - Jordan
Method, Numerical solution of ordinary differential equations-Euler’s
method, Modified Euler’s method, Runge - Kutta method of 2 nd

4 9
Order, Numerical solution of Laplace equation –Jacobi’s Method,
Curve Fitting by Method of Least Squares - Straight lines, Parabola.
(Text 2: Relevant topics from sections 2.5, 4.2, 7.5, 8.4, 8.5, 9.4)

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)
Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Examination- Internal Examination-

Assignment/
Attendance 1 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40
 End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)
In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one full
question out of two questions
Part A Part B Total
2 Questions from each module. Each question carries 9 marks.
Total of 8 Questions, each Two questions will be given from each module, out of which
carrying 3 marks 1 question should be answered.
60
Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub divisions.
(8x3 =24marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)

Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:
Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge Level
(KL)
Understand the concept, properties and important models of discrete
CO1 K3
random variables and to apply in suitable random phenomena.
Understand the concept, properties and important models of continuous
CO2 K3
random variables and to apply in suitable random phenomena.
Estimate population parameters, assess their certainty with confidence
CO3 intervals, and test hypotheses about population means and proportions K3
using z-tests and the one-sample t-test.
Apply numerical methods to find solutions of linear system of equations,
CO4 K3
ordinary differential equations and Laplace equations.
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - - 2
CO2 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - - 2
CO3 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - - 2
CO4 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - - 2
 Text Books
Sl. Name of the Name of the Edition and
Title of the Book
No Author/s Publisher Year
9 edition,
th

Probability and Statistics for Engineering

1 Devore J. L Cengage Learning 2016
and the Sciences

Introductory Methods of Numerical PHI Learning Pvt 5 edition,

th

2 S SSastry
Analysis Limited 2012

Reference Books
Sl. Name of the Edition and
Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
No Publisher Year
Probability, Random Variables and Papoulis, A. &Pillai, 4 edition,
th

1 McGraw Hill.
Stochastic Processes, S.U., 2002
Introduction to Probability and 6 edition,
th

2 Ross, S. M. Academic Press

Statistics for Engineers and Scientists 2020
Steven C. Chapra, McGraw Hill 8 edition,
th

3 Numerical methods for Engineers

Raymond P. Canale Education 2021

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

Module No. Link ID

1 https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/117/105/117105085/
2 https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/117/105/117105085/
3 https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/117/105/117105085/
4 https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/111/107/111107105/
 SEMESTER S4

MANUFACTURING PROCESSES

Course Code PCPET402 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:1:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 4 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) None Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. To provide students with a comprehensive understanding of various manufacturing

processes, including casting, forming, machining, joining, and additive manufacturing.

2. To enhance students' problem-solving skills by applying engineering principles to address

real-world manufacturing challenges.

SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Overview of casting processes, Advantages and limitations of casting,
Classification of casting processes, solidification.

Mold Design and Gating Systems ,Principles of mould design

considerations for moulds and cores ,Gating systems: types and design,
Riser design and solidification time calculation, Use of chills and chaplets.
1 11

Types of sand moulds and their properties ,Properties of moulding sands,

Pattern making and types of patterns, Core making and core materials,
Steps in the sand casting process, Advantages and disadvantages of sand
casting
 Special Casting Processes : Investment casting (lost wax process),Die
casting, Centrifugal casting, Shell moulding, Continuous casting, Squeeze
casting
Casting defects: Porosity, Shrinkage ,Inclusions Cold shuts ,Misruns, Hot
tears, Surface cracks ,Blowholes, Sand inclusions, Runout
Metal joining: classification; welding heat sources; fusion and non-fusion
welding processes; gas welding; electric arc welding; arc welding
machines; physics of welding arc, polarity; arc production; arc
characteristics; metal transfer; arc blow; welding electrode; consumable and
non-consumable arc welding, SMAW; GTAW; GMAW; SAW; AHW;
PAW; resistance welding; electro slag welding; thermit welding; solid state
welding;
2
11
Welding metallurgy: Heat Affected Zone; weldability of ferrous and non-
ferrous metals; design of weldments; joint design; residual stresses and
distortion; defects in welding; testing of welded joints; brazing and
soldering, beam welding; solid state welding; welding metallurgy: Heat
Affected Zone; weldability of ferrous and non-ferrous metals; residual
stresses and distortion; defects in welding; testing of welded joints; brazing
,soldering and braze welding.

Powder metallurgy: Introduction to powder metallurgy, Applications,

powder fabrication methods, metallic and ceramic powders, microstructural
control, powder characterization, powder treatment: mixing granulation,
degassing, coating;

Powder compaction and sintering. Principles of sintering: solid state

3 11
sintering, liquid phase sintering mechanisms: diffusion, vapor phase
transport, viscous flow Sintering atmospheres and their effects Secondary
operations: machining, heat treatment, surface finishing Hot isostatic
pressing (HIP) Infiltration and impregnation Joining techniques for powder
metallurgy components

Advanced manufacturing process: Abrasive jet machining (AJM),Water jet

4 11
machining (WJM),Abrasive water jet machining(AWJM),Electrochemical
 machining (ECM),Electro discharge machining (EDM), Electron beam
machining (EBM)and electron beam welding(EBW),Laser beam
machining (LBM)and processes, laser beam welding (LBW),ultrasonic
welding (USW)

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one full
question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

● 2 Questions from each ● Each question carries 9 marks.
module. ● Two questions will be given from each module, out
● Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
60
carrying 3 marks ● Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub
divisions.
(8x3 =24marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcomes Knowledge
Level (KL)
Demonstrate a fundamental understanding of various manufacturing
CO1 processes such as casting, forming, machining, joining, and additive K3
manufacturing.
Evaluate and select appropriate manufacturing processes for different
CO2 K3
materials and product designs.
Analyze and solve manufacturing-related problems by applying
CO3 K3
engineering principles and techniques.
Operate and handle manufacturing equipment and tools safely and
CO4 K3
effectively.
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 3 3 - - - 2 - - - - 2

CO2 3 3 3 - - - 2 - - - - 2

CO3 3 3 3 - - - 2 - - - - 2

CO4 3 3 3 - - - 2 - - - - 2

Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

 Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Fundamentals of Modern
5th Ed.
1 Manufacturing: Materials, Mikell P. Groover Wiley
2012
Processes, and Systems
Manufacturing Engineering and Serope Kalpakjian and 7th Ed.
2 Pearson
Technology Steven Schmid 2017

3 Manufacturing Science Ghosh and Mallik East West Press. 2nd Ed.
2010
Manufacturing Technology: McGraw Hill 4th Ed.
4 P.N. Rao
Foundry, Forming and Welding Education 2017

Reference Books

Name of the Edition

Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Materials and Processes in DeGarmo, Black, and 3rd Ed.
1 Wiley
Manufacturing, Kohser 2017
G. Boothroyd, P.
Product Design for 3rd Ed.
2 Dewhurst, and W. CRC Press
Manufacture and Assembly 2010
Knight
Welding Engineering and McGraw Hill 4th Ed.
3 Dr. R.S. Parmar
Technology Education 2017
 SEMESTER S4

MECHANICS OF METAL CUTTING AND MACHINE TOOLS

Course Code PCPET403 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week (L:
3:1:0:0 ESE Marks 60
T:P: R)

Credits 4 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) None Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1.To enable students to familiarize the basics of mechanics of metal cutting.

2.To familiarize with working of standard machine tools and their applications.

SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Introduction: Generating Motions of Machine Tools -Machines Using
Single-Point Tools -Machines Using Multipoint Tools-ASA and ORS Tool
Nomenclatures- Machining Using Abrasive Wheels-Machine Tool
Characteristics and Machining Equations.
Mechanics of Metal Cutting: Chip Formation – Merchant’s theory-The
Forces Acting on the Cutting Tool and Their Measurement -Specific
1 11
Cutting Energy -Plowing Force and the ‘Size Effect’ -The Apparent Mean
Shear Strength of the Work Material -Chip Thickness - Friction in Metal
Cutting.
Temperatures in Metal Cutting: Heat generation-Temperature Distribution
in Metal Cutting -The Measurement of Cutting Temperatures.

2 Tool Life and Tool Wear: Progressive Tool Wear-Forms of Wear in Metal 11
 Cutting-Taylor’s tool life Criteria-The Tool Material-The Work Material –
Machinability Index.
Cutting Fluids and Surface Roughness: Cutting Fluids-The Action of
Coolants and Lubricants -Application of Cutting Fluids -Surface Roughness
,chip control, chip breakers,chatter,hot machining.
Economics of Metal-Cutting Operations: Choice of Feed-Choice of Cutting
Speed -Tool Life for Minimum Cost and Minimum Production Time.
Centre Lathe: Construction- Various Operations, Taper Turning Methods,
Thread Cutting operation, Lathe Attachments & Accessories. Types of
Automation-Transfer Machines -Automatic Machines-Numerically
Controlled (NC) Machine Tools-Comparison of the Economics of Various
Automation Systems -Flexible Manufacturing System.
3 Reciprocating Machine Tools-Shaper: Principal parts, Classification, 11
Specification of shaper, Shaper Mechanisms, Hydraulic shaper. Cutting
Speed, Feed, Depth of cut & machining time-Shaper Operations-Shaping of
guide ways. Introduction to Planer -Principal parts and working of Double
Planer,Planing of Guide gibs- Slotter-Principal parts of Slotter-Working of
slotter-Slotting of Keyways .

Drilling operations: Twist drill geometry–Radial drilling machine-

calculation of machining time- Boring Machine-features-Operations-
Counter boring-Spot facing, Countersinking, Trepanning, Reaming,
Tapping.

Milling: Classification, Column and knee type milling machine - Milling

cutters and Classification-Fundamentals of milling Processes-Milling
4 11
operations. Cutting speed, feed, depth of cut and machining time. Indexing
Methods-Simple and compound indexing. Milling of Keyways. Gear
Cutting -shaping, forming and generation(Gear hobbing),Gear broaching,
Gear Shaving.

Abrasive Processes: Grinding wheel-Designation and Selection-Types of

Grinding Operations-Honing, Lapping,other finishing processes.
 Course Assessment Method
(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one full
question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

● 2 Questions from each ● Each question carries 9 marks.
module. ● Two questions will be given from each module, out
● Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
60
carrying 3 marks ● Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub
divisions.
(8x3 =24 marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcomes Knowledge
Level (KL)
Explain the fundamentals of metal cutting, including chip formation,
CO1 Merchant's theory, and forces acting on the cutting tool, and apply this K3
knowledge to optimize cutting parameters
Analyze the factors affecting tool life and tool wear, including Taylor's
CO2 tool life criteria, and apply that to evaluate the economics of metal- K3
cutting operations to select optimal cutting conditions
Describe the construction and operations of various machine tools ,
CO3 their selection as per application as well as get insight of the economics K2
of different automation systems
Assimilate various aspects of machining processes such as drilling,
CO4 boring, milling, and gear cutting operations and select these based on K3
the specific surface finish and precision requirements
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 2 2 1 - - - - - - - 1
CO2 3 3 2 1 - - - - - - - 1
CO3 2 2 2 - - - - - - - - 1
CO4 2 2 2 - - - - - - - - 1
CO5 2 2 2 - - - - - - - - 1
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation
 Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
2nd Ed.
1 Machining and Machine tools AB Chattopadhyay Wiley India
2017
Fundamentals of machining Geoffrey Boothroyd, 3rd Ed.
2 Taylor & Francis India
and machine tools Winston A Knight 2005
2nd Ed.
3 All about machine tools Heinrich Gerling New Age International
2006

Reference Books

Name of the Name of the Edition

Sl. No Title of the Book
Author/s Publisher and Year
Manufacturing Technology, Vol II- 3rd Ed.
1 Rao P N McGraw-Hill India
Metal Cutting and Machine Tools 2013
Fundamentals of Metal cutting and B L Juneja, G 3rd Ed.
2 New Age International
Machine tools S Sekhson 2003
Oxford University 2nd Ed.
3 Metal cutting principles M C Shaw
Press 2012
Machining Technology and
Helmi Youssef, 2nd Ed.
4 Operations- Volume-1 Taylor & Francis
Hassan El-Hofy 2022
Traditional machining technology
Computer Control of Manufacturing 1st Ed.
5 Yoram Koren McGraw-Hill India
System 2017
Automation, Production Systems and Mikell P 5th Ed.
6 Pearson
Computer Integrated Manufacturing Groover 2021
 Video Links

Module
Link ID
No.

https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/112/105/112105233/
1 Lecture Video 1-9 (Tool Geometry, Mechanics of Chip formation, Cutting Force)
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=ljveGnQw2G0
Metal Cutting and Machine Tools – IITKGP (Prof.Asimava Roy Choudhury) Lecture Video 11-
12(Tool Wear, Tool life https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=BvMrxFCd-3Y
Introduction to Machining and Machining Fluids-IITG (Dr M Ravi Sankar)
Tool wear and Tool life
2
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=cE-GPE6HtqM
Introduction to Machining and Machining Fluids-IITG (Dr M Ravi Sankar)
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=m9Ku8JLhlg8&list=PLY2p6n3OIhu6trgUqFIIBr2AkqOyU
N5bj&index=1
Metal Cutting and Machine Tools – IITKGP (Prof.Asimava Roy Choudhury) Lecture Video 13-
3 15 (Lathe operations)
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=1AwOzDv7j6o
Metal Cutting and Machine Tools – IITKGP (Prof.Asimava Roy Choudhury) Lecture Video 16-
18(Milling Machine, Gear cutting)
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=sKEw48dkB90
Working and Operation with Indexing Head
4 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Rf90Jbbcr3M
Spur and Helical Gear Cutting—IITKGP (Prof.Asimava Roy Choudhury)
Gear Shaping and Gear Hobbing
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=QRbFsNUMZ54&list=PLn6IrNKKOidnzCHfk7u-
emfuz4h1UdTqF&index=11
 SEMESTER S4

MECHANICS OF MACHINERY AND ROBOTICS

Course Code PBPET404 CIE Marks 60

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:1 ESE Marks 40
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 4 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) None Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. To familiarize different mechanisms and enable the students to do kinematic analysis.

2. To equip the students to understand and apply Robot kinematics and Robot dynamics
in real world situations.

SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Introduction to kinematics of Machinery: Linkages and joints -kinematic
pairs and chains-degrees of freedom and mobility-Inversion of 4 bar
chain and its various applications.
1 10
Kinematic Analysis: Displacement analysis, velocity, and acceleration
analysis (includes Coriolis acceleration)-Graphical approach. Velocity
analysis by Instantaneous centre method.
Introduction to kinematic synthesis: Type synthesis and Dimensional
synthesis-Function generation -Path generation- Motion generation-
2 Chebyshev’s spacing of precision points. 10
Graphical method for dimensional synthesis: 2 position and 3 position
synthesis. Analytical Method-Freudenstein's equation- loop closure
 equation.
Synthesis of lower pair mechanisms such as Straight line and quick
return mechanisms; Higher Pairs: Cam and follower for prescribed
displacement - Gears and gear trains for prescribed speed and torque
transmission.
Introduction to Robotics-Industrial robot manipulators, Service
applications, electro mechanical components.
Robotic kinematics:Kinematic models of manipulators, definition of
pose-position description-Orientation description, changing description
from frame to frame, homogeneous transformation matrix.
3 Manipulator Kinematics: link description and link to reference frame 12
connection - Denavit-Hardenberg (DH) representation-Forward
kinematics, Inverse Kinematics-Formulation - Enumerated using simple
manipulator configurations.
Workspace Analysis and Trajectory Planning-planning with constraints
(Case study-based explanation only).
Velocity analysis and Static Analysis of manipulators: Linear and
angular velocity of links-Jacobian matrix, singularity, Static Analysis of
manipulator.
Robot Dynamics: Introduction to dynamics, Lagrangian formulation
(Overview)of manipulator dynamics. Linear robot dynamics -Force
acceleration relationship for 1 DOF system, equation of motion for 2
4 12
DOF robot arm.
Motion Control:Path v/s Trajectory, Joint space v/s cartesian description,
Point to point control, trajectory generation, continuous path control,
force control, hybrid position/force control system.
Overview of Robot Programming, scope for mobile robots, need and
application of AI and ML in Robotics.

Suggestion on Project Topics:

● Design and Analysis of a Four-Bar Linkage for a Specific Application.

● Velocity analysis of quick return mechanism by Instantaneous centre method.
● Synthesis of a Cam Mechanism for a given Motion Program.
 ● Design of a Mechanism for Converting Rotational Motion to Linear Motion.
● Analysis of a Pantograph Mechanism for a specific task.
● Develop a program to generate DH parameters for a Manipulator.
● Design of a Robot Arm for Pick-and-Place Tasks.
● Forward and Inverse Kinematics Analysis of a 2-DOF Robot Arm.
● Development of a robot arm for a pick-and-place task in a manufacturing line.
● Kinematic synthesis of a mechanism for a robotic arm for a specific industry.
● Design of a Robot Gripper for a specific object manipulation task.

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 60 marks, ESE: 40 marks)
Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Attendance Project Internal Ex-1 Internal Ex-2 Total

5 30 12.5 12.5 60

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one full
question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

● 2 Questions from each 2 questions will be given from each module, out of
module. which 1 question should be answered. Each question
● Total of 8 Questions, can have a maximum of 2 subdivisions. Each question 40
each carrying 2 marks carries 6 marks.
(8x2 =16 marks) (4x6 = 24 marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcomes Knowledge
Level (KL)
Identify and appreciate the key Mechanisms they encounter in real K3
CO1
world and engineering scenarios.
Apply the core concept of kinematics for the design and synthesis of K3
CO2
single degree of freedom of mechanisms.
Design and synthesis of robotics mechanisms for achieving desired K5
CO3
output motion.
Evaluate and select appropriate mechanisms and robotics systems for K4
CO4
specific applications.
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 - - - - 1 - - - - - 1
CO2 3 3 2 1 - 1 - - - - - 1
CO3 3 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - 2
CO4 3 3 3 1 2 - - - 2 - - 2
 Text Books
Edition and
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s Name of the Publisher
Year
McGraw Hill 4th Ed.
1 Theory of Machines S S Rattan
Education 2017
Theory of Machines and 25th Ed.
2 P L Ballaney Khanna Publishers
Mechanisms 2022
McGraw Hill 2nd Ed.
3 Introduction to Robotics Saha S K
Education 2017
Frank Chongwoo Park,
Modern Robotics: Mechanics, Cambridge University 1st Ed.
4 Kevin M. Lynch
Planning, and Control Press 2017

Reference Books
Edition and
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s Name of the Publisher
Year
Mechanism and Machine 1st Ed.
1 Ashok G. Ambekar Prentice Hall India
Theory 2007
Arthur G.Erdman,
Mechanism Design-Analysis 4th Ed.
2 George N.Sandor, Pearson Education
and Synthesis. Vol-1 2001
Sridhar Kota
Introduction to Robotics Pearson 4th Ed.
3 John Craig
Mechanics and Control Education, 2022
Kinematics of Machinery 1st Ed.
4 J.S.Rao Springer
through HyperWorks 2011
John J.Uicker,Gordon
Theory of Machine and R. Oxford University 5th Ed.
5
Mechanisms Pennock,JosephE.Shigle Press 2017
y
Robotics Technology and McGraw Hill 2nd Ed.
6 Deb S R.andDebS
Flexible Automation Education (Ind) 2010
Robotics: Designing the
2nd Ed.
7 mechanism for Automated Ben-Zion Sandler Academic Press
1999
Machinery
 Video Links
Module No. Link ID
Kinematics of Machines – Prof. A. K. Mallik (fundamentals concepts)
https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112/104/112104121/
1 Kinematics of Mechanism and Machines -Prof. A. Das Gupta (displacement, velocity and
acceleration Analysis)
https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112/105/112105268/
Theory of Mechanism- Prof.SujathaSrinivasan(Mechanism Synthesis)
2
https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/112/106/112106270/
Mechanics and Control of Robotic Manipulators (NPTEL/NOC/IITPkd)-Prof.Dr.Santhakumar
3 Mohan
https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/112/106/112106304/
Mechanics and Control of Robotic Manipulators (NPTEL/NOC/IITPkd)-Prof.Dr.Santhakumar
4 Mohan
https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/112/106/112106304/

PBL Course Elements

L: Lecture R: Project (1 Hr.), 2 Faculty Members

(3 Hrs.) Tutorial Practical Presentation
Simulation/ Presentation
Lecture delivery Project identification Laboratory Work/ (Progress and Final
Workshops Presentations)
Group discussion Project Analysis Data Collection Evaluation
Question answer Project Milestone Reviews,
Sessions/ Analytical thinking and Feedback,
Testing
Brainstorming self-learning Project reformation (If
Sessions required)
Poster Presentation/
Guest Speakers
Case Study/ Field Video Presentation: Students
(Industry Prototyping
Survey Report present their results in a 2 to 5
Experts)
minutes video
 Assessment and Evaluation for Project Activity

Sl. No Evaluation for Allotted

Marks
1 Project Planning and Proposal 5
2 Contribution in Progress Presentations and Question Answer Sessions 4
3 Involvement in the project work and Team Work 3
4 Execution and Implementation 10
5 Final Presentations 5
6 Project Quality, Innovation and Creativity 3
Total 30

1. Project Planning and Proposal (5 Marks)

● Clarity and feasibility of the project plan

● Research and background understanding
● Defined objectives and methodology

2. Contribution in Progress Presentation and Question Answer Sessions (4 Marks)

● Individual contribution to the presentation

● Effectiveness in answering questions and handling feedback

3. Involvement in the Project Work and Team Work (3 Marks)

● Active participation and individual contribution

● Teamwork and collaboration

4. Execution and Implementation (10 Marks)

● Adherence to the project timeline and milestones

● Application of theoretical knowledge and problem-solving
● Final Result
5. Final Presentation (5 Marks)

● Quality and clarity of the overall presentation

● Individual contribution to the presentation
● Effectiveness in answering questions

6. Project Quality, Innovation, and Creativity (3 Marks)

● Overall quality and technical excellence of the project

● Innovation and originality in the project
● Creativity in solutions and approaches
 SEMESTER S4

MACHINE DESIGN

Course Code PEPET411 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) None Course Type Theory

Course Objective:

● To familiarize and apply the principles of stress strain and deformation to analyse and
solve problems in mechanical components and structures.

SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Introduction: Common Engineering materials and its Properties, Selection of
Materials, steps in design Process Principles of standardisation, limit and fits
as per IS specification.
9
1
Estimation of design loads, factor of safety, Theories of failure, Stress
concentration factor, Variable stress, fatigue failure, endurance limit, design
for finite and infinite life, Soderberg and Goodman criteria.

Detachable joints: design of screws, standards, thread stresses, preloading of

bolts, fatigue and shock load, eccentric loading. Power screws, mechanism of
9
power screws, thread stresses, efficiency of power screws.
2
Riveted joint: Stresses in riveted joint, design of riveted joints with central
and eccentric loads, boiler and tank joints, structural joints.
 Welded joints: types of welded joints, stresses, design of welded joints
subjected to axial, torsional and bending loads, welds subjected to fluctuating
loads.
Springs: Classification, Common Spring materials, stress and deflection in
helical compression spring with axial loading, curvature effects, resilience,
spring surging, buckling, critical frequency of helical springs – helical 9
3 torsion springs design of automotive leaf springs.

Pressure vessels, thin cylinders, Thick cylinder equation, Hydraulic

accumulators. Compound Cylinders.

Design of gears: design of spur, helical, bevel gears, virtual or formative

number of teeth - gear tooth failures- beam strength, Lewis equation,
Buckingham’s equation for dynamic load, wear load, endurance strength of
tooth, heat dissipation. 9
4
Design of Sliding contact bearings: lubricants & viscosity - journal bearings,
hydrodynamic theory, bearing characteristic number, design considerations.

Design of Rolling contact bearing: Classification, bearing life, static and

dynamic load capacity, dynamic equivalent load, selection of bearings.

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)
Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40
End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one full
question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

● 2 Questions from each ● Each question carries 9 marks.
module. ● Two questions will be given from each module, out
● Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
60
carrying 3 marks ● Each question can have a maximum of 3
subdivisions.
(8x3 =24 marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)

Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcomes Knowledge
Level (KL)
Understand mechanical design procedure, Material selection, Codes &
CO1 K2
use of standards.
CO2 Apply the knowledge in designing detachable and permanent joints. K3
Determine safe design of spring and Pressure vessels describe different
CO3 K3
types of bearings and clutches, its application; design procedures.
Describe different types of bearings and Gears, its application; design
CO4 K3
procedures.
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create
 CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 3 3 - - - 2 - - - 2 2
CO2 3 3 3 - - - 2 - - - 2 2
CO3 3 3 3 - - - 2 - - - 2 3
CO4 3 3 3 - - - 2 - - - 2 3
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
McGraw Hill 5th Ed.
1 Design of machine Elements V B Bhandari
Education 2020

M. F. Spotts & Terry E. 8th Ed.

2 Design of machine Elements Pearson Education
Shoup 2019

Robert C. Juvinall & 5th Ed.

3 Machine Component Design WILEY
Kurt M. Marshek 2019

Reference Books

Name of the Edition

Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
6th Ed.
1 Design of Machine Elements Dr.G.K.Vijayaraghavan Lakshmi Publications
2015
Shigley'S Mechanical Richard G. Budynas 11th Ed.
2 McGraw Hill
Engineering Design J. Keith Nisbett 2020
 SEMESTER S4

MATERIAL CHARACTERIZATION TECHNIQUES

Course Code PEPET412 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) None Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. To familiarize the methods required to characterize materials such as metals and alloys.
2. To prove a comprehensive understanding of characterizing materials based on various
properties.
SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Introduction to material characterization techniques, Structure analysis
tools: X-ray diffraction, Phase identification, indexing and lattice parameter
determination.
1 9
Analytical line profile fitting using various models, Neutron diffraction;
Reflection High energy electron Diffraction (RHEED), Low energy
Electron Diffraction (LEED).
Microscopy techniques: Introduction to Microscopes, Optical Microscopy
(OM), Transmission Electron Microscopy (TEM); Basic Electron
scattering, Concepts of resolution.
2 9
TEM instruments, Various imaging modes, Analysis of micrographs,
Electron Energy Loss Spectroscopy, Scanning Electron Microscopy,
Rutherford backscattering spectrometry.
 Atomic Force Microscopy, Scanning Probe Microscopy, Thermal analysis
techniques: Differential Thermal Analysis (DTA), Differential Scanning
3 Calorimetry (DSC), Thermo-gravimetric analysis (TGA), Electrical 9
Characterization Techniques: Electrical resistivity in bulk and thin films,
Hall effect, Magnetoresistance.
Magnetic characterization techniques: Introduction to Magnetism,
Measurement Methods, Measuring Magnetization by Force, Measuring
Magnetization by Induction method, Types of measurements using
magnetometers: M-H loop, temperature dependent magnetization, time
4 dependent magnetization. Measurements using AC susceptibility, Magneto- 9
optical Kerr effect, Nuclear Magnetic Resonance, Electron Spin Resonance,
Optical characterization techniques: UV-VIS spectroscopy, Fourier
transform infrared spectroscopy, Raman spectroscopy, X-ray photoelectron
spectroscopy.

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written)

5 15 10 10 40
 End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one full
question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

● 2 Questions from each ● Each question carries 9 marks.
module. ● Two questions will be given from each module, out of
● Total of 8 Questions, each which 1 question should be answered.
60
carrying 3 marks ● Each question can have a maximum of 3 subdivisions.
(4x9 = 36 marks)
(8x3 =24 marks)
Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcomes Knowledge
Level (KL)
CO1 Summarize about tools used for structure analysis of crystals K2
CO2 Explain various microscopy techniques used in material characterization. K2
CO3 Classify thermal and electrical characterization techniques. K2
CO4 Outline about magnetic and optical characterization techniques K2
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 2 - 2 3 - - - - - - 3

CO2 3 2 - 2 2 - - - - - - 3

CO3 3 3 - 3 2 - - - - - - 3

CO4 3 3 - 3 3 - - - - - - 3

Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

 Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Materials Characterization S Zhang, L. Li and Ashok 1st Ed.
1 CRC Press
Techniques Kumar 2008.
Materials Science and Robert Wolfgang Cahn, Peter
2 Technology: A Comprehensive Haasen, Edward J. Kramer, Eric VCH 2005
Treatment, Vol 2A & 2B) Lifshin

Reference Books
Name of the Edition and
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher Year
Physical methods for Materials P. E. J. Flewitt and 3rd Ed.
1 IOP Publishing
Characterization R K Wild 2017
Semiconductor Material and
2 D. K. Schroder Wiley-IEEE Press 3rd Ed. 2006
Device Characterization
Characterization of Nanophase
3 Ed. Z LWang Willet-VCH 1st Ed. 2000
Materials
Materials Characterisation,
4 ASM hand book ASM hand book 9th Ed., 1997
Vol. 10
5 ASTM handbook, Vol. 3 ASTM hand book ASTM hand book 1997
Pearson
6 Elements of X-ray diffraction B.D. Cullity, S. R. Stock 3rd Ed. 2014
EducationLtd.
7 Thermal Analysis of Materials R.F. Speyer CRC Press eBook 2014

Video Links

Module
Link ID
No.

1 https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/112/106/112106227/

2 https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc22_mm14/preview

3 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/113105100

4 https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/115/103/115103030/
 SEMESTER S4

MACHINE LEARNING

Course Code PEPET413 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week 60
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) None Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. To learn and implement various machine learning algorithms.

2. To gain hands-on experience with machine learning frameworks and tools.

SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Python basics: Data types, control structures, functions, Introduction to
Object-Oriented Programming (OOP),Classes and objects, inheritance,
polymorphism, encapsulation. 9
1
Advanced Python concepts: List comprehensions, lambda functions,
decorators Introduction to NumPy , Scikit-learn and pandas for data
manipulation, Hands-on with NumPy arrays and pandas Data Frames.
Recap on Linear Algebra Essentials: Vectors, matrices, and operations
Eigenvalues and eigenvectors, Linear transformations.

Calculus for Machine Learning: Differentiation and integration, Partial

derivatives and gradients, Applications in optimization and learning 9

2 algorithms.

Probability theory: Basic concepts, distributions, Descriptive statistics:

Mean, median, variance, Inferential statistics: Hypothesis testing, confidence
intervals.
 Data cleaning: Handling missing values, outliers, Data normalization and
scaling Exploratory Data Analysis (EDA)
Introduction to Supervised Learning: Linear regression: Simple and
multiple linear regression. Classification: Logistic regression, decision trees,
k-nearest neighbours (KNN).

9
3 Performance metrics: Accuracy, precision, recall, F1-score.Introduction to
Unsupervised Learning: Clustering: K-means, hierarchical clustering,
DBSCAN.

Dimensionality reduction: Principal Component Analysis (PCA), t-SNE.

Model Evaluation and Hyperparameter Tuning: Model evaluation
techniques: Train-test split, cross-validation ,Hyperparameter tuning: Grid
search, random search. 9

4 Advanced Machine Learning Algorithms :Support Vector Machines

(SVM),Ensemble methods: Bagging, boosting, random forests, Neural
networks and introduction to deep learning.Case studies on machine learning
applications in various domains.

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40
 End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

● 2 Questions from each ● Each question carries 9 marks.
module. ● Two questions will be given from each module,
● Total of 8 Questions, each out of which 1 question should be answered.
60
carrying 3 marks ● Each question can have a maximum of 3
subdivisions.
(8x3 =24 marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)

Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcomes Knowledge
Level (KL)

CO1 Understand the principles and concepts of machine learning. K2

CO2 Implement basic machine learning algorithms. K3

CO3 Apply machine learning models to solve practical problems. K3
Utilize machine learning frameworks and tools for developing and
CO4 testing models. K3

Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
3 3 - - 3 - 2 - - - - 2
CO1
3 3 3 2 3 - 2 1 - - - 2
CO2
3 3 3 3 3 - 2 1 - - - 3
CO3
3 3 3 3 3 - 2 1 - - - 3
CO4
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation
 Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
1st Ed.
1 Machine Learning Tom Mitchell McGraw-Hill 2017

3rd Ed.
Hands-On Machine Learning with 2020
2 Scikit-Learn, Keras, and Aurelien Geron O'Reilly Media
TensorFlow

Mathematics For Machine Cambridge 1st Ed.

3 Marc Peter Deisenroth.
Learning University Press 2020

Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
1st Ed.
lan Goodfellow, Yoshua
1 Deep Learning MIT Press 2016
Bengio
Sebastian Raschka and 2nd Ed.
2 Python Machine Learning Packt Publishing
Vahid Mirjalili: 2017

Video Links

Link ID

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=jGwO_UgTS7I&list=PLoROMvodv4rMiGQp3WXShtMGgzqpfVfbU
 SEMESTER S4

MATERIAL HANDLING AND MATERIALS MANAGEMENT

Course Code PEPET414 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) None Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. To familiarize techniques required for material handling and materials management.

2. The course discusses various methods and approaches for materials managing and
handling in various manufacturing and service industries.

SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Introduction to materials handling techniques- Definitions, scope and
objectives- Traditional and modern views of material handling.
9
1 Principles of material handling-Concept of unit load- Material handling
classification-by materials-by method-by equipment type-Stages in material
handling system design.

Introduction to material storage and store keeping-Scope and objectives of

store keeping-Functions of store keeping-Features of successful store
keeping-Relationship of stores department with other departments-Benefits 9
of stores keeping-Stores Organisation.
2
Deciding the location and layout of stores- Classification and codification of
materials-merits and demerits- Types of stores and storage equipment -
Preservation of stores and stock verification.

Introduction to materials management-Scope, primary and secondary

9
3
objectives of materials management-Functions of management as applied to
 materials -Addressing the conflicting objectives in materials management.

Role of specifications in purchasing and materials management-

development of simple and complex specifications and common problems
with specifications-Budgeting and materials planning .Purchasing cycle and
principles of purchasing- Value analysis and techniques for materials
management.

Introduction to integrated materials management- Need for integrated

concept- Advantages of integrated materials management -Organisation for
integrated materials management-Activities of materials management.
9

4 Desirable qualities of Purchasing and materials manager-Interdepartmental

relationship in to integrated materials management- Performance appraisal of
materials management- Management Information system for materials
management.

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

● 2 Questions from each ● Each question carries 9 marks.
module. ● Two questions will be given from each module, out
● Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
60
carrying 3 marks ● Each question can have a maximum of 3
subdivisions.
(8x3 =24marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcomes Knowledge
Level (KL)
CO1 Summarize techniques for material handling. K2
CO2 Explain various techniques used for material storage. K2
CO3 Explain various functions for materials management. K2
CO4 Outline the concept of integrated materials management. K3
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
3 2 - 2 3 - - - - - - 3
CO1
3 2 - 2 2 - - - - - - 3
CO2
3 2 - 3 2 - - - - - - 3
CO3
3 2 - 3 3 - - - - - - 3
CO4
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
1 Materials Management- Text PHI Learning Private 2nd Ed.
A K Chitale, R C Gupta
and Cases Ltd. 2011
Materials Management- PHI Learning Private
2 A K Datta 2nd Ed.
Procedure, Text and cases Ltd.
2005
J. R. Tony Arnold,
3 Introduction to Materials 7th Ed.
Stephen N. Chapman, Pearson Education
Management 2011
Lloyd M. Clive
 Reference Books

Name of the Edition and

Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher Year
Materials Management: An P. Gopalakrishnan, M. Prentice-Hall of India
1 1st Ed. 2004
Integrated Systems Approach Sundaresan Pvt. Ltd.
2nd Ed.
2 Materials Handling Handbook John Wiley & Sons John Wiley & Sons
1985
 SEMESTER S4

STATISTICAL QUALITY CONTROL

Course Code PEPET415 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week 3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60

(L: T:P: R)
Credits Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.
5/3
Prerequisites (if any)
None Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. To familiarize statistical quality control methods to monitor and improve engineering

processes.
2. To enable students to practice effective statistical quality control methods for solving
real-world problems.
SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours

Basic Concepts of Quality: Meaning of quality, quality of design, quality

of conformance, quality of performance, quality function, goal post view
of quality, other aspects of quality, quality and profitability, quality
control, quality characteristics, cost of quality, optimum cost of
performance, value of quality, balance between cost of quality and value
of quality, specification of quality, quality control and inspection, quality
policy, statistical quality control (SQC), role of feedback in quality
control, quality perspective.
1 9

Quality Assurance: Quality assurance manual, field complaints, quality

rating of outgoing product, quality survey or quality audit, Executive
report on quality, inspection planning, quality budget, vendor quality
rating, organization for quality function, organization for acceptance,
manufacturing planning for quality, planning for process control,
statistical process control (SPC), Quality function deployment (QFD),
quality policy deployment.
 Total Quality Management: Total quality control, need for management of
product quality, concept of total quality management(TQM), TQM
philosophies, Taguchi philosophy, concept of loss function, orthogonal
arrays, linear graphs, analysis of variance(ANOVA), signal to noise(S/N)
2 ratio, Crosby’s fourteen steps, TQM models, Training for quality 9
management, ISO:9000 and TQM, benchmarking, Kaizen and Kairyo
systems, tools and techniques of Kaizen, brainstorming, DMAIC cycle,
Poka-Yoke, JIDOKA, waste control, 5S for improvement, Just in time
manufacturing (JIT), total quality management for excellence (TQMEX).

Control Charts for Variables: Concept of variation, distinction between

variables and attribute data, theory of control charts, definition of control

chart, relationship between , relationship

between , relationship between , choice of variables,

basics of sub-grouping, size and frequency of subgroups, control limits,
chance of making an error , starting the control charts, conclusions from
3 control charts, control chart patterns, run sum test, revising control limits, 9
process capability analysis.

Control Chart for Attributes: Limitations of control chart for variables,

Attribute charts, comparison of , control limits on

p chart, choice between p chart and np chart, periodic review and revision
of p chart, control charts for defects

Acceptance Sampling: Introduction, sampling methods, operating

characteristic curve (OCC), producer’s risk and consumer’s risk, quality
indices for acceptance sampling plans, Average outgoing quality limit
4 (AOQL), steps in the design of an acceptance plan, sampling plans, 9
Average total inspection (ATI) curve, Dodge –Romig system.

Use Excel/SPSS to plot control charts and to solve problems in sampling.

 Course Assessment Method
(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Attendance Internal Analyse Evaluate Total

Examination
5 15 10 10 40

Criteria for Assessment (Analyse and Evaluate): 20 marks

Phases Assessment Criteria Marks

Problem Definition
a. Clearly defines the real-world quality issue..
5
b. Examine and identify relevant contextual
factors.
Problem Analysis
Analyse a. Present a structured realistic solution
5
methodology.
b. Compare and justify the proposed solutions
with evidence and logical reasoning
Validation of Results

a. Thoroughly evaluate the proposed solutions.

b. Compares trade-offs, advantages, and
disadvantages. 5
c. Considers feasibility, scalability, and practical
implications

Conclusion and Report Writing

Evaluate a. Summarizes procedure, findings and insights, 5
limitation and scope for future work.
b. Preparation of report with all components of
project report.

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE):

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose
any one full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

● Minimum 1 and 2 questions will be given from each module, out of
Maximum 2 Questions which 1 question should be answered. Each
from each module. question can have a maximum of 3 subdivisions.
60
● Total of 8 Questions, Each question carries 9 marks.
each carrying 3 marks (4x9 = 36 marks)
(8x3 =24 marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcomes Knowledge
Level (KL)
CO1 Understand the basics of quality and quality assurance. K2
CO2 Understand the basics of TQM. K2
Apply principles and models of control charts to monitor and control K4
CO3 the engineering processes and to analyze the capabilities of the
processes.
Apply and analyze acceptance sampling techniques to solve real world K4
CO4
problems.
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
3 2 - - - - - - 2 - - 2
CO1
3 2 1 1 - - - - 2 - - 2
CO2
3 3 2 1 2 - - - 2 2 - 2
CO3
3 3 2 2 3 - - - 2 2 - 2
CO4
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Revised
1 Statistical Quality Control M. Mahajan Dhanpat Rai & Co
Ed. 2016
Introduction to Statistical 7th Ed.
2 D. C. Montgomery John Wiley Sons
Quality Control 2012
 Reference Books

Name of the Edition

Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Fundamentals of Quality 4th Ed.
1 Mitra A Wiley
Control and Improvement 2016
Eugene L Grant and
McGraw-Hill 7th Ed.
2 Statistical Quality Control Richard S Leavenworth
Education 2017

1st Ed.
3 Statistical Quality Control M Jeya Chandra CRC Press LLC
2001

Video Links
Module
Link ID
No.
1 https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/110/105/110105088/
2 https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/110/105/110105088/

https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/110/105/110105088/
3
https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/116/102/116102019/#
https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/110/105/110105088/
4
https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/116/102/116102019/#
 SEMESTER S3/S4

ECONOMICS FOR ENGINEERS

(Common to All Branches)

Course Code UCHUT346 CIE Marks 50

Teaching Hours/Week
2:0:0:0 ESE Marks 50
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 2 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) None Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. Understanding of finance and costing for engineering operation, budgetary planning and
control
2. Provide fundamental concept of micro and macroeconomics related to engineering industry
3. Deliver the basic concepts of Value Engineering.

SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours

Basic Economics Concepts - Basic economic problems – Production

Possibility Curve – Utility – Law of diminishing marginal utility – Law of
Demand - Law of supply – Elasticity - measurement of elasticity and its
1 6
applications – Equilibrium- Changes in demand and supply and its effects

Production function - Law of variable proportion – Economies of Scale –

Internal and External Economies – Cobb-Douglas Production Function

Cost concepts – Social cost, private cost – Explicit and implicit cost – Sunk
2 6
cost - Opportunity cost - short run cost curves - Revenue concepts
 Firms and their objectives – Types of firms – Markets - Perfect Competition
– Monopoly - Monopolistic Competition - Oligopoly (features and
equilibrium of a firm)

Monetary System – Money – Functions - Central Banking –Inflation -

Causes and Effects – Measures to Control Inflation - Monetary and Fiscal
policies – Deflation

3 Taxation – Direct and Indirect taxes (merits and demerits) - GST 6

National income – Concepts - Circular Flow – Methods of Estimation and
Difficulties - Stock Market – Functions- Problems faced by the Indian stock
market-Demat Account and Trading Account – Stock market Indicators-
SENSEX and NIFTY

Value Analysis and value Engineering - Cost Value, Exchange Value, Use
Value, Esteem Value - Aims, Advantages and Application areas of Value
4 6
Engineering - Value Engineering Procedure - Break-even Analysis - Cost-
Benefit Analysis - Capital Budgeting - Process planning

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 50 marks , ESE: 50 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

10 15 12.5 12.5 50
End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one full
question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

● Minimum 1 and 2 questions will be given from each module, out of
Maximum 2 Questions which 1 question should be answered. Each question
from each module. can have a maximum of 2 sub divisions. Each question
50
● Total of 6 Questions, carries 8 marks.
each carrying 3 marks
(4x8 = 32 marks)
(6x3 =18marks)
Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)

Understand the fundamentals of various economic issues using laws K2

CO1 and learn the concepts of demand, supply, elasticity and production
function.
Develop decision making capability by applying concepts relating to K3
CO2 costs and revenue, and acquire knowledge regarding the functioning of
firms in different market situations.
Outline the macroeconomic principles of monetary and fiscal systems, K2
CO3
national income and stock market.
Make use of the possibilities of value analysis and engineering, and K3
CO4 solve simple business problems using break even analysis, cost benefit
analysis and capital budgeting techniques.

Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create
 CO-PO Mapping Table:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 - - - - - 1 - - - - 1 -

CO2 - - - - - 1 1 - - - 1 -

CO3 - - - - 1 - - - - - 2 -

CO4 - - - - 1 1 - - - - 2 -

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Geetika, Piyali Ghosh
1 Managerial Economics Tata McGraw Hill, 2015
and Chodhury

H. G. Thuesen, W. J.
2 PHI 1966
Engineering Economy Fabrycky

3 R. Paneerselvam PHI 2012

Engineering Economics

Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Leland Blank P.E,
1 Mc Graw Hill 7TH Edition
Engineering Economy Anthony Tarquin P. E.

2 Indian Financial System Khan M. Y. Tata McGraw Hill 2011

Engineering Economics and Donald G. Newman,

3 Engg. Press, Texas 2002
analysis Jerome P. Lavelle

Contemporary Engineering Prentice Hall of India

4 Chan S. Park 2001
Economics Ltd
 SEMESTER S3/S4

ENGINEERING ETHICS AND SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT

Course Code UCHUT347 CIE Marks 50

2:0:0:0
Teaching Hours/Week
ESE Marks 50
(L: T:P: R)
2
Credits Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.
None
Prerequisites (if any) Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. Equip with the knowledge and skills to make ethical decisions and implement gender-
sensitive practices in their professional lives.
2. Develop a holistic and comprehensive interdisciplinary approach to understanding
engineering ethics principles from a perspective of environment protection and
sustainable development.
3. Develop the ability to find strategies for implementing sustainable engineering solutions.

SYLLABUS
Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Fundamentals of ethics - Personal vs. professional ethics, Civic
Virtue, Respect for others, Profession and Professionalism,
Ingenuity, diligence and responsibility, Integrity in design,
development, and research domains, Plagiarism, a balanced outlook

1 on law - challenges - case studies, Technology and digital 6

revolution-Data, information, and knowledge, Cybertrust and
cybersecurity, Data collection & management, High technologies:
connecting people and places-accessibility and social impacts,
Managing conflict, Collective bargaining, Confidentiality, Role of
 confidentiality in moral integrity, Codes of Ethics.
Basic concepts in Gender Studies - sex, gender, sexuality, gender
spectrum: beyond the binary, gender identity, gender expression,
gender stereotypes, Gender disparity and discrimination in
education, employment and everyday life, History of women in
Science & Technology, Gendered technologies & innovations, Ethical
values and practices in connection with gender - equity, diversity &
gender justice, Gender policy and women/transgender
empowerment initiatives.
Introduction to Environmental Ethics: Definition, importance and
historical development of environmental ethics, key philosophical
theories (anthropocentrism, biocentrism, ecocentrism). Sustainable
Engineering Principles: Definition and scope, triple bottom line
(economic, social and environmental sustainability), life cycle analysis
and sustainability metrics. Ecosystems and Biodiversity: Basics of
2 6
ecosystems and their functions, Importance of biodiversity and its
conservation, Human impact on ecosystems and biodiversity loss, An
overview of various ecosystems in Kerala/India, and its significance.
Landscape and Urban Ecology: Principles of landscape ecology,
Urbanization and its environmental impact, Sustainable urban
planning and green infrastructure.
Hydrology and Water Management: Basics of hydrology and water
cycle, Water scarcity and pollution issues, Sustainable water
management practices, Environmental flow, disruptions and disasters.
Zero Waste Concepts and Practices: Definition of zero waste and its
principles, Strategies for waste reduction, reuse, reduce and recycling,
3 6
Case studies of successful zero waste initiatives. Circular Economy
and Degrowth: Introduction to the circular economy model,
Differences between linear and circular economies, degrowth
principles, Strategies for implementing circular economy practices and
degrowth principles in engineering. Mobility and Sustainable
 Transportation: Impacts of transportation on the environment and
climate, Basic tenets of a Sustainable Transportation design,
Sustainable urban mobility solutions, Integrated mobility systems, E-
Mobility, Existing and upcoming models of sustainable mobility
solutions.
Renewable Energy and Sustainable Technologies: Overview of
renewable energy sources (solar, wind, hydro, biomass), Sustainable
technologies in energy production and consumption, Challenges and
opportunities in renewable energy adoption. Climate Change and
Engineering Solutions: Basics of climate change science, Impact of
climate change on natural and human systems, Kerala/India and the
Climate crisis, Engineering solutions to mitigate, adapt and build

4 resilience to climate change. Environmental Policies and 6

Regulations: Overview of key environmental policies and regulations
(national and international), Role of engineers in policy
implementation and compliance, Ethical considerations in
environmental policy-making. Case Studies and Future Directions:
Analysis of real-world case studies, Emerging trends and future
directions in environmental ethics and sustainability, Discussion on
the role of engineers in promoting a sustainable future.

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 50 marks , ESE: 50)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Continuous internal evaluation will be based on individual and group activities undertaken
throughout the course and the portfolio created documenting their work and learning. The
portfolio will include reflections, project reports, case studies, and all other relevant materials.
● The students should be grouped into groups of size 4 to 6 at the beginning of the
semester. These groups can be the same ones they have formed in the previous semester.
● Activities are to be distributed between 2 class hours and 3 Self-study hours.
 ● The portfolio and reflective journal should be carried forward and displayed during the
7th Semester Seminar course as a part of the experience sharing regarding the skills
developed through various courses.

Sl. Item Particulars Group Marks

No. /Indivi
dual
(G/I)
1 Reflective Weekly entries reflecting on what was learned, I 5
Journal personal insights, and how it can be applied to local
contexts.
2 Micro project 1 a) Perform an Engineering Ethics Case Study G 8
analysis and prepare a report
(Detailed 1 b) Conduct a literature survey on ‘Code of Ethics
documentatio for Engineers’ and prepare a sample code of
n of the ethics
project, 2. Listen to a TED talk on a Gender-related topic, do G 5
including a literature survey on that topic and make a report
methodologie citing the relevant papers with a specific analysis
s, findings, of the Kerala context
and 3. Undertake a project study based on the concepts G 12
reflections) of sustainable development* - Module II, Module
III & Module IV
3 Activities 2. One activity* each from Module II, Module III & G 15
Module IV
4 Final A comprehensive presentation summarising the key G 5
Presentation takeaways from the course, personal reflections, and
proposed future actions based on the learnings.
Total Marks 50

*Can be taken from the given sample activities/projects

Evaluation Criteria:
● Depth of Analysis: Quality and depth of reflections and analysis in project reports
and case studies.
● Application of Concepts: Ability to apply course concepts to real-world problems
and local contexts.
● Creativity: Innovative approaches and creative solutions proposed in projects and
reflections.
● Presentation Skills: Clarity, coherence, and professionalism in the final
presentation.
 Course Outcomes (COs)
At the end of the course students should be able to:
Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
Develop the ability to apply the principles of engineering ethics K3
CO1
in their professional life.
Develop the ability to exercise gender-sensitive practices in their K4
CO2
professional lives
Develop the ability to explore contemporary environmental K5
CO3
issues and sustainable practices.
Develop the ability to analyse the role of engineers in promoting K4
CO4
sustainability and climate resilience.
Develop interest and skills in addressing pertinent environmental K3
CO5 and climate-related challenges through a sustainable engineering
approach.
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 2 3 3 2 2

CO2 1 3 2 3 3 2 2

CO3 3 3 2 3 2 2

CO4 1 3 3 2 3 2 2

CO5 3 3 2 3 2 2
 Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
2nd
Cambridge
Ethics in Engineering edition &
1 Caroline Whitbeck University Press &
Practice and Research August
Assessment
2011
Cambridge
Virtue Ethics and Professional November
2 Justin Oakley University Press &
Roles 2006
Assessment
2nd
Cambridge
edition &
3 Sustainability Science Bert J. M. de Vries University Press &
December
Assessment
2023
Cambridge
Sustainable Engineering
4 Bhavik R. Bakshi, University Press & 2019
Principles and Practice
Assessmen
M Govindarajan, S PHI Learning
5 Engineering Ethics Natarajan and V S Private Ltd, New 2012
Senthil Kumar Delhi
New age
Professional ethics and human
6 values
RS Naagarazan international (P) 2006.
limited New Delhi
Tata McGraw Hill
Mike W Martin and 4" edition,
7 Ethics in Engineering Publishing Company
Roland Schinzinger, 2014
Pvt Ltd, New Delhi

Suggested Activities/Projects:

Module-II
● Write a reflection on a local environmental issue (e.g., plastic waste in Kerala backwaters or
oceans) from different ethical perspectives (anthropocentric, biocentric, ecocentric).
● Write a life cycle analysis report of a common product used in Kerala (e.g., a coconut, bamboo
or rubber-based product) and present findings on its sustainability.
● Create a sustainability report for a local business, assessing its environmental, social, and
economic impacts
● Presentation on biodiversity in a nearby area (e.g., a local park, a wetland, mangroves, college
campus etc) and propose conservation strategies to protect it.
● Develop a conservation plan for an endangered species found in Kerala.
● Analyze the green spaces in a local urban area and propose a plan to enhance urban ecology
using native plants and sustainable design.
● Create a model of a sustainable urban landscape for a chosen locality in Kerala.

Module-III

● Study a local water body (e.g., a river or lake) for signs of pollution or natural flow disruption
and suggest sustainable management and restoration practices.
● Analyse the effectiveness of water management in the college campus and propose
improvements - calculate the water footprint, how to reduce the footprint, how to increase supply
through rainwater harvesting, and how to decrease the supply-demand ratio
● Implement a zero waste initiative on the college campus for one week and document the
challenges and outcomes.
● Develop a waste audit report for the campus. Suggest a plan for a zero-waste approach.
● Create a circular economy model for a common product used in Kerala (e.g., coconut oil, cloth
etc).
● Design a product or service based on circular economy and degrowth principles and present a
business plan.
● Develop a plan to improve pedestrian and cycling infrastructure in a chosen locality in Kerala
Module-IV

● Evaluate the potential for installing solar panels on the college campus including cost-benefit
analysis and feasibility study.
● Analyse the energy consumption patterns of the college campus and propose sustainable
alternatives to reduce consumption - What gadgets are being used? How can we reduce demand
using energy-saving gadgets?
● Analyse a local infrastructure project for its climate resilience and suggest improvements.
● Analyse a specific environmental regulation in India (e.g., Coastal Regulation Zone) and its
impact on local communities and ecosystems.
● Research and present a case study of a successful sustainable engineering project in Kerala/India
(e.g., sustainable building design, water management project, infrastructure project).
● Research and present a case study of an unsustainable engineering project in Kerala/India
highlighting design and implementation faults and possible corrections/alternatives (e.g., a
housing complex with water logging, a water management project causing frequent floods,
infrastructure project that affects surrounding landscapes or ecosystems).
 SEMESTER S4

MACHINE TOOL LAB

Course Code PCPEL407 CIE Marks 50

Teaching Hours/Week
0:0:3:0 ESE Marks 50
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 2 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) None Course Type Lab

Course Objectives:

1. To impart hands-on training on conventional and advanced machine tools.

2. To provide training in precision machining operations with adherence to the standards

Expt.
Experiments (Mandatory)
No.
1 Step turning, grooving- Part I.

2 Step turning, grooving- Part II.

3 Taper turning.
4 Thread cutting (single start Only).
5 Spur Gear cutting using Simple indexing Method -Part I.
6 Spur Gear cutting using Simple indexing Method -Part II.
7 Shaping rectangular block.
8 Rectangular slot and Dovetail cutting -Part I.
9 Rectangular slot and Dovetail cutting -Part II.
10 Slotting of Keyway.
 Course Assessment Method
(CIE: 50 marks, ESE: 50 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Preparation/Pre-Lab Work experiments,

Viva and Timely Internal
Attendance Total
completion of Lab Reports / Record Examination
(Continuous Assessment)
5 25 20 50

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE):

Procedure/ Conduct of experiment/ Result with valid

Preparatory Execution of work/ inference/ Viva
Record Total
work/Design/ troubleshooting/ Quality of Voce
Algorithm Programming Output
10 15 10 10 5 50

● Submission of Record: Students shall be allowed for the end semester examination only upon
submitting the duly certified record.

● Endorsement by External Examiner: The external examiner shall endorse the record

Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcomes Knowledge
Level (KL)
Demonstrate the working principles and applications of various machine
CO1 K2
tools.
CO2 Make use of machine tools and machine tools operations. K3
Utilize different types of cutting tools and their applications in various
CO3 K3
machining processes
CO4 Analyze and interpret experimental data related to machining processes K4
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create
 CO- PO Mapping (Mapping of Course Outcomes with Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 2 - 2 - - - - 3 1 - 3

CO2 3 2 - 2 - - - - 3 1 - 3

CO3 3 2 - 3 - - - - 3 1 - 3

CO4 3 3 - 2 - - - - 3 1 - 3
1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Production Technology:
R.K. Jain and S.C. 1st Ed.
1 Manufacturing Processes, Khanna Publishers
Gupta 2001
Technology, and Automation
Manufacturing Processes for Serope Kalpakjian and 6th Ed.
2 Pearson Education
Engineering Materials Steven Schmid 2018

Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
2nd Ed.
1 Manufacturing Science Ghosh and Mallik East West Press.
2010
Manufacturing Technology: McGraw Hill 4th Ed.
2 P.N. Rao
Foundry, Forming and Welding Education 2017

Continuous Assessment (25 Marks)

1. Preparation and Pre-Lab Work (7 Marks)

● Pre-Lab Assignments: Assessment of pre-lab assignments or quizzes that test understanding

of the upcoming experiment.
● Understanding of Theory: Evaluation based on students’ preparation and understanding of the
theoretical background related to the experiments.
 2. Conduct of Experiments (7 Marks)

● Procedure and Execution: Adherence to correct procedures, accurate execution of

experiments, and following safety protocols.
● Skill Proficiency: Proficiency in handling equipment, accuracy in observations, and
troubleshooting skills during the experiments.
● Teamwork: Collaboration and participation in group experiments.

3. Lab Reports and Record Keeping (6 Marks)

● Quality of Reports: Clarity, completeness and accuracy of lab reports. Proper documentation
of experiments, data analysis and conclusions.
● Timely Submission: Adhering to deadlines for submitting lab reports/rough record and
maintaining a well-organized fair record.

4. Viva Voce (5 Marks)

● Oral Examination: Ability to explain the experiment, results and underlying principles
during a viva voce session.

Final Marks Averaging: The final marks for preparation, conduct of experiments, viva,
and record are the average of all the specified experiments in the syllabus.

Evaluation Pattern for End Semester Examination (50 Marks)

1. Procedure/Preliminary Work/Design/Algorithm (10 Marks)

● Procedure Understanding and Description: Clarity in explaining the procedure and

understanding each step involved.
● Preliminary Work and Planning: Thoroughness in planning and organizing
materials/equipment.
● Algorithm Development: Correctness and efficiency of the algorithm related to the
experiment.
● Creativity and logic in algorithm or experimental design.
2. Conduct of Experiment/Execution of Work/Programming (15 Marks)

● Setup and Execution: Proper setup and accurate execution of the experiment or programming
task.

3. Result with Valid Inference/Quality of Output (10 Marks)

● Accuracy of Results: Precision and correctness of the obtained results.

● Analysis and Interpretation: Validity of inferences drawn from the experiment or quality of
program output.

4. Viva Voce (10 Marks)

● Ability to explain the experiment, procedure results and answer related questions
● Proficiency in answering questions related to theoretical and practical aspects of the subject.

5. Record (5 Marks)

● Completeness, clarity, and accuracy of the lab record submitted

 SEMESTER S4

PRODUCTION ENGINEERING LAB

Course Code PCPEL408 CIE Marks 50

Teaching Hours/Week
0:0:3:0 ESE Marks 50
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 2 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) None Course Type Lab

Course Objectives:

1. To provide students with a solid foundation in the principles and practices of various
manufacturing processes.
2. To equip students with hands-on experience in operating production machinery and
conducting manufacturing experiments.

Expt.
Experiments (Minimum 10 Experiments should be completed)
No.
1 Testing of Green compression strength.

2 Hot compression strength.

3 Sand Permeability test.

4 Sieve Analysis -determination of AFS number.
5 Flowability measurement of Metals.
6 Shear angle measurement in Orthogonal metal cutting.
7 Weld Strength test.
8 Study of Heat Affected Zone(HAZ) in welding -Metallurgical study and Micro hardness
test.
9 Formability test of sheet metals using Ericsson Cupping Test.
10 Deformation Analysis of sheet metals.
12 Tool wear assessment and verification of Taylor’s Tool life equation.
12 2 axis and 3 axis cutting Forces measurement.
13 Non Destructive Testing of Components -Dye Penetrant test, Magnetic Crack detection.
14 Acceptance Test of Machine tools.
15 Eccentric turning of a component in Lathe.
16 Multi start thread cutting in Lathe.
17 NC Manual part programming and its simulation.
 Course Assessment Method
(CIE: 50 marks, ESE: 50 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Preparation/Pre-Lab Work experiments,

Viva and Timely Internal
Attendance Total
completion of Lab Reports / Record Examination
(Continuous Assessment)
5 25 20 50

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE):

Procedure/ Conduct of experiment/ Result with valid

Preparatory Execution of work/ inference/ Viva
Record Total
work/Design/ troubleshooting/ Quality of Voce
Algorithm Programming Output
10 15 10 10 5 50

● Submission of Record: Students shall be allowed for the end semester examination only upon
submitting the duly certified record.

● Endorsement by External Examiner: The external examiner shall endorse the record

Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcomes Knowledge
Level (KL)
Demonstrate a comprehensive understanding of various manufacturing
CO1 K3
processes such as casting, welding, machining, and forming.
Utilize production machinery and tools, ensuring safety and efficiency in a
CO2 K3
manufacturing environment
Analyze and optimize manufacturing processes to enhance productivity,
CO3 K4
reduce waste, and improve overall efficiency.
Utilize problem-solving skills to address and troubleshoot issues encountered
CO4 K3
in manufacturing processes.
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create
 CO- PO Mapping (Mapping of Course Outcomes with Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
3 2 - 2 3 - - - 2 2 - 3
CO1
3 2 - 2 3 - - - 2 2 - 3
CO2
3 2 - 2 2 - - - 2 2 - 3
CO3
3 3 - 2 2 - - - 2 2 - 3
CO4
1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Production Technology:
R.K. Jain and S. C. 1st Ed.
1 Manufacturing Processes, Khanna Publishers
Gupta 2001
Technology, and Automation
Manufacturing Processes for Serope Kalpakjian and 6th Ed.
2 Pearson Education
Engineering Materials Steven Schmid 2018

Reference Books

Name of the Edition

Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Manufacturing Technology: McGraw Hill 4th Ed.
1 P. N. Rao
Foundry, Forming and Welding Education 2017

2nd Ed.

2 Manufacturing Science Ghosh and Mallik East West Press. 2010

Continuous Assessment (25 Marks)
1. Preparation and Pre-Lab Work (7 Marks)

● Pre-Lab Assignments: Assessment of pre-lab assignments or quizzes that test understanding

of the upcoming experiment.
● Understanding of Theory: Evaluation based on students’ preparation and understanding of the
theoretical background related to the experiments.
2. Conduct of Experiments (7 Marks)

● Procedure and Execution: Adherence to correct procedures, accurate execution of

experiments, and following safety protocols.
● Skill Proficiency: Proficiency in handling equipment, accuracy in observations, and
troubleshooting skills during the experiments.
● Teamwork: Collaboration and participation in group experiments.

3. Lab Reports and Record Keeping (6 Marks)

● Quality of Reports: Clarity, completeness and accuracy of lab reports. Proper documentation
of experiments, data analysis and conclusions.
● Timely Submission: Adhering to deadlines for submitting lab reports/rough record and
maintaining a well-organized fair record.

4. Viva Voce (5 Marks)

● Oral Examination: Ability to explain the experiment, results and underlying principles
during a viva voce session.

Final Marks Averaging: The final marks for preparation, conduct of experiments, viva,
and record are the average of all the specified experiments in the syllabus.

Evaluation Pattern for End Semester Examination (50 Marks)

1. Procedure/Preliminary Work/Design/Algorithm (10 Marks)

● Procedure Understanding and Description: Clarity in explaining the procedure and

understanding each step involved.
● Preliminary Work and Planning: Thoroughness in planning and organizing
materials/equipment.
 ● Algorithm Development: Correctness and efficiency of the algorithm related to the
experiment.
● Creativity and logic in algorithm or experimental design.

2. Conduct of Experiment/Execution of Work/Programming (15 Marks)

● Setup and Execution: Proper setup and accurate execution of the experiment or programming
task.

3. Result with Valid Inference/Quality of Output (10 Marks)

● Accuracy of Results: Precision and correctness of the obtained results.

● Analysis and Interpretation: Validity of inferences drawn from the experiment or quality of
program output.

4. Viva Voce (10 Marks)

● Ability to explain the experiment, procedure results and answer related questions
● Proficiency in answering questions related to theoretical and practical aspects of the subject.

5. Record (5 Marks)

● Completeness, clarity, and accuracy of the lab record submitted

SEMESTER 5
PRODUCTION ENGINEERING
 SEMESTER S5

INDUSTRIAL ENGINEERING

Course Code PCPET501 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:1:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 4 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) None Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. To enable students to understand industrial engineering and productivity concepts.

2. To enable students to furnish adequate background for applying concepts of work study,
industrial relations and industrial safety.
SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Introduction to industrial engineering: Modern concepts in industrial
engineering, functions of industrial engineer, applications of industrial
engineering.

1 Productivity: Definition and concepts, input output model, factors affecting 11

productivity, productivity ratios, measurement of productivity, productivity
improvement, productivity in Indian industries, productivity and product
design process.
Productivity and work study: Role of work study in improving
productivity, specific contributions of method study and work
measurement.
2 11
Method study: Procedure of method study - selection, recording and
representation of work and activities, critical analysis, developing best
method, installation and maintenance of standard method.
Work measurement: Purpose of work measurement, basic procedure,
performance rating, concept of normal time, allowances. Work sampling
technique of work measurement, introduction to predetermined motion time
3 11
systems.
Motion Study: Memo motion and micro motion study, therbligs, SIMO
chart, principles of motion economy related to worker, workplace and tools.
 Industrial relations: Objectives, factors affecting industrial relations,
psychological attitudes to work and working conditions, Causes and effects
of industrial disputes, methods to settle industrial disputes.
4 11
Industrial fatigue: Factors contributing to industrial fatigue, effect of
fatigue, methods to eliminate industrial fatigue.
Industrial safety: Objectives, measures for ensuring industrial safety.

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

● 2 Questions from each ● Each question carries 9 marks.
module. ● Two questions will be given from each module, out
● Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
60
carrying 3 marks ● Each question can have a maximum of 3
subdivisions.
(8x3 =24 marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
Apply the principles of industrial engineering and concepts of
CO1 K3
productivity.
Make use of the concepts of work study for improving productivity and
CO2 K3
to develop methods for accomplishing work tasks.
Apply work measurement techniques in organizations and to establish
CO3 K3
the standard time.
Identify the concepts of industrial relations and industrial safety in the
CO4 K3
real world.
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
2 - 2 - - - - - - - - 2
CO1
2 - 2 - - - - - - - - 2
CO2
2 2 2 - 2 - - - - - - 2
CO3
2 - 2 - - 2 - - - - - 2
CO4
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books

Name of the Edition and

Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher Year
Industrial Engineering and Khanna
1 B Kumar 10th Ed., 2004
Management Publishers

Industrial Engineering and Danpat Rai

2 O P Khanna 5th Ed., 2018
management publication
 Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Introduction to Industrial Avraham Shtub, 2nd Ed.,
1 Taylor and Francis
Engineering Yuval Cohen 2017
Oxford and IBH 3rd Ed.,
2 Introduction to Work study ILO
Publishing 2015
4th Ed.,
3 Reliability Engineering L S Srinath East west Press
2005
Eugene L Grant,
7th Ed.,
4 Statistical Quality Control Richard S, McGraw Hill
2006
Leavenworth

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/112/107/112107249/
Link ID
https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/112/107/112107142/
 SEMESTER S5

SENSORS AND MECHATRONIC SYSTEMS

Course Code PCPET502 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:1:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 4 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) None Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. To familiarize the principles of sensors, its characteristics, and its interfacing with
microprocessors/microcontrollers.
2. To enable the students to understand the concept of PLC systems, ladder programming and
key elements of Mechatronics systems, its modelling and its analysis.

SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Introduction to Sensors and Actuators: Performance terminology of
sensors, Displacement, Position & Proximity Sensors, Force, Fluid
pressure, Liquid flow sensors, temperature, light sensor, Acceleration and
1 11
Vibration measurement. MEMS, selection of sensor.
Mechanical Actuation System, Hydraulic & Pneumatic Actuation System,
Electrical Actuation System, Data Presentation system.
Signal Conditioning: Basic Digital circuits, Introduction to signal
processing & Op-Amp, Op-Amp as signal conditioner, Analogue to
Digital Converter, Digital to Analogue Converter, filtering, multiplexer,
data acquisition.
2 11
Mechatronics Systems: Elements of mechatronic systems, concept of
controls, Mechanical system model, Electrical system model, Fluid
system model. Microprocessor, Micro Controller, Introduction to
Programming of Microcontrollers.
Dynamic response of systems: first and second order systems, Transfer

3 function; first and second order systems, systems in series and in 11

feedback loop.
 Frequency response: Sinusoidal input, Phasors, Bode plot performance
specifications and stability.
Closed loop controllers: P, I, PID Controllers, Digital Controllers.
Programmable Logic Controllers: Basic structure, programming,
Mnemonics, timers, internal relays, and counters, shift register, master,
and jump control.
4 11
Communication systems: networks and protocols. Input/output systems;
interfacing, input/output addressing, and interfacing requirements.
Simple case studies based on mechatronic systems.

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written)

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

● 2 Questions from each ● Each question carries 9 marks.
module. ● Two questions will be given from each module, out
● Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
60
carrying 3 marks ● Each question can have a maximum of 3
subdivisions.
(8x3 =24 marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)

Identify different types of sensors and actuators and its applicability to a

CO1 K3
real time problem.
Apply the concept of signal processing and to identify the key elements
CO2 K3
of the mechatronics system.
Perform time and frequency domain analysis, and design closed loop
CO3 K4
controllers.
Develop PLC ladder programming and identify the communication
CO4 K3
requirements in the systems.
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

3 2 - 2 3 - - - - - - 3
CO1
3 2 - 2 2 - - - - - - 3
CO2
3 3 - 3 2 - - - - - - 3
CO3
3 3 - 3 3 - - - - - - 3
CO4
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Mechatronics: Electronic
7th Ed.,
1 Control Systems in Mechanical William Bolton Pearson
2023
and Electrical Engineering

Dedas Shetty, Kolk and 2nd Ed.,

2 Mechatronic system Design Pearson
Richard 2010
 Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
2nd Ed.,
1 Mechatronic Handbook Robert H Bishop CRC press
2007
D.G. Alciatore & 4th Ed.,
2 Introduction to Mechatronics Tata Mc Graw Hill
Michael B. Histand 2012
R. Merzouki A K,
Intelligent Mechatronic
Samantaray P M, 1st Ed.,
3 Systems: Modelling, Control Springer
Pathak B Ould 2013
and Diagnosis
Bouamama

1st Ed.,
4 Mechatronic Systems Design Janschek, Klaus Springer
2012

Mechatronic Systems:
Boukas K, Al-Sunni, 1st Ed.,
5 Analysis, Design and Springer
Fouad M 2011
Implementation

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

Module No Link ID
1 https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/108/108/108108147/
2 https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/112/107/112107298/

3 https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/112/107/112107214/

4 https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/107/106/107106081/
 SEMESTER S5

MECHANICAL MEASUREMENTS AND QUALITY CONTROL

Course Code PCPET503 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) None Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. To familiarize the concepts of measurement techniques and instruments.

2. To enable students to apply the Quality Control Principles.

SYLLABUS
Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Basics of metrology: Need for inspection, accuracy and precision, standards of
measurements, hysteresis, linearity, resolution of measuring instruments,
threshold, drift, zero stability, loading effect and system response. static
performance characteristics, Errors and their classification, concept of
calibration.
Linear Measurement Instruments: vernier calliper, micrometer, combination set,
1 9
slip gauges, limit gauges, problems on measurements with gauge.
Force measurement: load cells, cantilever beams, proving rings, differential
transformers, measurement of torque- torsion bar dynamometer. mechanical
strain gauges, electrical strain gauges, strain gauge: materials, gauge factors,
theory of strain gauges and method of measurement, bridge arrangement,
temperature compensation.
Measurements of gear and thread parameters: Gear tooth terminology, sources of
errors in manufacturing of gears, measurement of tooth thickness- Gear tooth
vernier, constant chord method, addendum comparator method and base tangent
2 9
method, measurement of tooth profile- tool maker’s microscope, involute tester,
measurement of pitch, measurement of run out, lead and backlash checking,
measurement of concentricity, alignment of gears.
 Errors in threads, screw thread gauges, measurement of elements of the external
and internal threads, thread calliper gauges, tachometers.
Surface Metrology: Concepts and terminology, analysis of surface traces,
specification of surface texture characteristics, and method of measuring surface
finish: stylus system of measurement, stylus probe instruments, wave length,
frequency and cut off, other methods for measuring surface roughness-
3 9
pneumatic method, light interference microscopes, Mecrin instruments.
Comparators: Functional requirements, classification- mechanical comparators,
mechanical optical comparators, electrical comparators, pneumatic comparators,
Coordinate Measuring Machines.
Quality and Quality control: Quality concepts, corrective and prevention
methods for ensuring quality, cost of quality, organization for quality, ISO
standards, Deming prize, Malcolm Baldrige quality award, Rajiv Gandhi
National Quality Award, quality audits, quality by design, quality culture, quality
4 9
from the customer perspective, Quality Information Systems, quality planning,
quality tools- six-sigma, process capability (numerical problems), quality control
charts (numerical problems based on P, X̄ & R Chart), strategic quality
management.

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal
Assignment/ Internal Examination- 2
Attendance Examination-1 Total
Microproject (Written)
(Written)

5 15 10 10 40
 End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

● 2 Questions from each module. ● Each question carries 9 marks.
● Total of 8 Questions, each ● Two questions will be given from each module, out of
carrying 3 marks which 1 question should be answered.
60
● Each question can have a maximum of 3 subdivisions.
(8x3 =24 marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)

Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
CO1 Demonstrate the concepts of metrology and measuring instruments. K2
Apply the measuring instruments for measuring gear and thread
CO2 K3
parameters.
Identify the roughness standards and roughness measurements; make use
CO3 K3
of the concept of comparators.

CO4 Demonstrate the concepts of quality and quality control. K2

Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 2 - 2 3 - - - - - - 3
CO2 3 2 - 2 2 - - - - - - 3
CO3 3 3 - 3 2 - - - - - - 3
CO4 3 3 - 3 3 - - - - - - 3
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation
 Text Books
Name of the Edition and
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher Year
Engineering Metrology and N V Raghavendra,
1 Oxford University Press 1st Ed., 2013
Measurements L Krishnamurthy
Managing for Quality and Evans J R and Lindsay W South Western Cengage
2 9th Ed., 2012
Performance Excellence M Learning

Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
1st Ed.,
1 The Physics of Metrology Alex Hebra Springer Vienna
2010
Springer
2nd Ed.,,
2 Mechanical Measurements S P Venkateshan International
2021
Publishing
A Textbook Of Engineering Dhanpat Rai 8th Ed.,
3 I C Gupta
Metrology Publications 2015
Theory and Design for Richard S Figliola, Wiley India Pvt. 3rd Ed.,
4
Mechanical Measurements Donald E Beasley Limited 2008
22nd Ed.,
5 Engineering Metrology R K Jain Khanna Publishers
2022
1st Ed.,
6 Total Quality Management P N Mukherjee Prentice Hall India
2006
Sunil Luthra, Dixit
Total Quality Management
Garg, Ashish 1st Ed.,
7 (TQM) - Principles, CRC Press
Agarwal, Sachin K 2020
Methods, and Applications
Mangla
Strategic Continuous 1st Ed.,
8 Gerhard J Plenert McGraw Hill LLC
Process Improvement 2011
Dale H Basterfield,
Glen H Besterfield, 5th Ed.,
9 Total Quality Management Pearson
Hemant 2020
Urdhwareshe

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/112/106/112106179/
Link ID
https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/110/104/110104080/
 SEMESTER S5

CAD/CAM/CAE

Course Code PBPET504 CIE Marks 60

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:1 ESE Marks 40
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 4 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) None Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. To familiarize the students about the principles and concepts in CAD/CAM and CAE.
2. To enable the students to design and optimize products and manufacturing processes.
SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Morphology of design: Sequential and concurrent engineering,
manufacturing planning and control, manufacturing models, elements of
CAD and CAM, CAD/CAM integration, CAD/CAM data bases and
system architecture, requirements of CAD/CAM Packages.
Transformations: Geometric and viewing transformation, basic
1 10
transformation matrices- translation, rotation, scaling etc.
Geometric modelling: Mathematical representation of curves, parametric
representation of analytical and synthetic curves, parametric equations-
circle, ellipse, parabola, synthetic curves, geometric construction of
curves, control point and weights.
Wireframe modelling: Introduction to transformation of geometric
models, visual realism, surface modelling- Bezier and B-spline surfaces.
solid modelling techniques: Boundary representation, constructive solid
geometry, analytical solid modelling, design and engineering

2 applications. 10
Standards for computer graphics: Standards for exchange images, data
exchange standards- DFX, IGES, STEP, digital imaging and
communication in medicine, STL conversion for additive manufacturing,
introduction to reverse Engineering.
 Introduction to NC systems and CNC: Machine axis and coordinate
system, CNC machine tools, principle of operation CNC.
CNC Part programming: fundamentals, machine origin, program origin,
part origin, setting up of origin- absolute and incremental programming,

3 preparatory codes and miscellaneous codes, detailed manual part 12

programming for turning & milling operations using G codes and M
codes, canned cycles and subroutines, cutting cycles, loops, sub program
and macros, tool radius compensation CNC programming with interactive
graphics, introduction of CAM packages.
Engineering analysis of solid models: Use of CAE in product
development, discretization methods- FEM, FDM and FVM, CAE tools,
basic steps in CAE.
Element shapes: Nodes, nodal unknowns, coordinates systems, global
coordinates, local coordinates: natural coordinates, shape functions,

4 convergence requirement of shape functions, derivation of the shape 12

functions using polynomials, numerical enumeration using 2 noded spring
and bar elements
Computer aided design optimization: Introduction to topology
optimization, role of AI and ML in design optimization, generative design
-overview of popular CAE software used in industry .

Suggestion on Project Topics:

● Solid modelling of consumer products using commercial CAD software.
● Experiment on CAD Customization (E.g., modelling of a customizable phone case).
● Familiarise with the reverse engineering procedures to develop required CAD models.
● Obtain 3D printable STL files from the DICOM model.
● Develop a CAM program to manufacture a complex part using CNC machining (E.g., a
turbine blade).
● Evaluate the structural and mechanical integrity using CAE software.
● Compare the thermal performance of two different heat sinks using CAE software.
● Weight reduction of an existing design of an engineering component.
 Course Assessment Method
(CIE: 60 marks, ESE: 40 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Attendance Project Internal Ex-1 Internal Ex-2 Total

5 30 12.5 12.5 60

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

● 2 Questions from each  2 questions will be given from each module,
module. out of which 1 question should be answered.
● Total of 8 Questions, Each question can have a maximum of 2 40
each carrying 2 marks subdivisions. Each question carries 6 marks.
(8x2 =16 marks) (4x6 = 24 marks)

Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
Apply the concepts of CAD/CAM and geometric modelling in design and
CO1 K3
manufacturing.

CO2 Identify various forms of CAD models for solving engineering problems. K3
CO3 Utilize CNC programming and CAM concepts for industrial applications. K3
CO4 Analyze various engineering models to optimize the design of systems. K4
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create
 CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 1 1 - - - - - - - - 3
CO2 3 2 1 - 1 - - - - - - 3
CO3 3 2 1 - 2 - - - - - - 3
CO4 3 3 3 - 3 - - - - - - 3

Text Books
Name of the Name of the Edition and
Sl. No Title of the Book
Author/s Publisher Year
CAD/CAM Computer Aided
1 M Groover, E. Zimmer Pearson 1st Ed., 2014
Design and Manufacturing
Text book of finite element
2 P Seshu PHI learning 1st Ed., 2003
analysis
Practical Finite element Finite to infinite
3 Nithin S Gokhale 1st Ed., 2020
Analysis publishers, India

Reference Books
Name of the Name of the Edition and
Sl. No Title of the Book
Author/s Publisher Year
Basics of Computer Aided
1 Geometric Design: An M Ganesh Dreamtech Press 3rd Ed., 2019
Algorithmic Approach
Mathematical Elements of David F Rogers, 15th Reprint,
2 McGraw Hill
Computer Graphics Adams J H 2008
Principles of computer aided
3 Farid M Amirouche Pearson 2nd Ed., 2004
design and Manufacturing
Computer Control of
4 Yoram Koren McGraw Hill 1st Ed., 1983
Manufacturing Systems
A first course in the Finite Thomson-
5 Logan D L 1st Ed., 2012
Element Method Engineering
Introduction to finite element
6 J N Reddy Mc Graw Hill India 4th Ed., 1999
method
Amir, M
A Hands-on introduction to
7 Mirzendehdel, Infinite books 1st Ed., 2017
Topology Optimization
Krishnan Suresh
Design theory and methods
8 Kuang-Hua Chang Academic Press Inc 1st Ed., 2018
using CAD/CAE
 Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)
Module
Link ID
No.
1 https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/112/102/112102

2 https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/112/102/112102

3 https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/112/104/112104289/

4 https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/112/102/112102101/

PBL Course Elements

L: Lecture R: Project (1 Hr.), 2 Faculty Members

(3 Hrs.)
Tutorial Practical Presentation
Simulation/
Project Presentation (Progress and Final
Lecture delivery Laboratory Work/
identification Presentations)
Workshops
Group discussion Project Analysis Data Collection Evaluation
Question answer
Project Milestone Reviews,
Sessions/ Analytical thinking
Testing Feedback, Project reformation (If
Brainstorming and self-learning
required)
Sessions
Poster Presentation/
Guest Speakers Case Study/ Field Video Presentation: Students
Prototyping
(Industry Experts) Survey Report present their results in a 2 to 5
minutes video

Assessment and Evaluation for Project Activity

Allotted
Sl. No Evaluation for
Marks
1 Project Planning and Proposal 5
2 Contribution in Progress Presentations and Question Answer 4
Sessions
3 Involvement in the project work and Team Work 3
4 Execution and Implementation 10
5 Final Presentations 5
6 Project Quality, Innovation and Creativity 3
Total 30
1. Project Planning and Proposal (5 Marks)

● Clarity and feasibility of the project plan

● Research and background understanding
● Defined objectives and methodology

2. Contribution in Progress Presentation and Question Answer Sessions (4 Marks)

● Individual contribution to the presentation

● Effectiveness in answering questions and handling feedback

3. Involvement in the Project Work and Team Work (3 Marks)

● Active participation and individual contribution

● Teamwork and collaboration

4. Execution and Implementation (10 Marks)

● Adherence to the project timeline and milestones

● Application of theoretical knowledge and problem-solving
● Final Result

5. Final Presentation (5 Marks)

● Quality and clarity of the overall presentation

● Individual contribution to the presentation
● Effectiveness in answering questions

6. Project Quality, Innovation, and Creativity (3 Marks)

● Overall quality and technical excellence of the project

● Innovation and originality in the project
● Creativity in solutions and approaches
 SEMESTER S5

APPLIED THERMAL ENGINEERING

Course Code PEPET521 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) None Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. To enable students about the concepts of gas power cycles and prime movers.
2. To familiarize the principles and working of pumps, compressors and heat exchangers .

SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Overview of gas power cycles: Otto, Diesel, Brayton, and Rankine cycles,
thermodynamic analysis and efficiency calculations, regenerative,
1
intercooling, and reheating in gas power cycles, applications in power
9
generation and propulsion systems.
Classification of prime movers: Internal combustion engines, steam
turbines, and gas turbines, working principles and thermodynamic cycles,
2
performance analysis and efficiency calculations, applications and
9
selection of prime movers.
Types of pumps: Centrifugal, reciprocating, and rotary pumps,
performance characteristics and selection criteria, pump performance
curves and system curves, cavitation and its prevention.

3 Types of compressors: Reciprocating, rotary, and centrifugal 9

compressors, thermodynamic analysis of compressors, performance
characteristics and selection criteria, efficiency and work input of
compressors.
Heat Exchangers: Types of heat exchangers- shell and tube, plate and
finned tube heat exchangers, heat transfer principles and design equations,
4
measurement of effectiveness-NTU method and LMTD method, fouling 9
and maintenance of heat exchangers.
 Course Assessment Method
(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

● 2 Questions from each ● Each question carries 9 marks.
module. ● Two questions will be given from each module, out
● Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
60
carrying 3 marks ● Each question can have a maximum of 3
subdivisions.
(8x3 =24 marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)

Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
Apply the concepts of gas power cycles and their thermodynamic
CO1 K3
characteristics.

CO2 Apply the working principles of prime movers and their applications. K3
CO3 Identify the performance characteristics of pumps and compressors. K3
CO4 Develop the parameters of different types of heat exchangers. K3
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create
 CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 2 1 2 - - - - - - - 2
CO2 3 2 2 2 - - - - - - - 2
CO3 3 3 3 2 - - - - - - - 2
CO4 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - 2
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Thermodynamics: An Yunus A Çengel, McGraw-Hill 9th Ed.,
1
Engineering Approach Michael A Boles Education 2019
McGraw-Hill 4th Ed.,
2 Power Plant Engineering P K Nag
Education 2017
New Age
Onkar Singh 4th Ed.,
3 Applied Thermodynamics International
2018
Private Limited

A Textbook of Power Plant 5th Ed.,

4 R K Rajput Laxmi Publications
Engineering 2016

Reference Books
Name of the Edition and
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher Year
McGraw Hill
1 Hydraulic Machines Subramanya 1st Ed., 2017
Education
McGraw Hill 3rd Ed.,
2 Gas Turbines V Ganesan
Education 2017
McGraw Hill
3 I C Engines V Ganesan 4th Ed., 2017
Education

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

Link ID https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/112/107/112107291/
 SEMESTER S5

MICRO ELECTRO MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

Course Code PEPET522 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) None Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. To provide a comprehensive understanding of the fundamental principles and intrinsic

characteristics of MEMS.
2. To introduce students about materials, fabrication process, packaging and integration
strategies of MEMS.
SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Introduction to MEMS and Fabrication Technologies: Introduction,
significance and new trends in micro and nano-scale systems, intrinsic
characteristics of MEMS, elements of MEMS- microsensors and
microactuators.
Microelectronics Fabrication Process: Basics of the microelectronics

1 fabrication process, materials for MEMS- silicon, polymers and metals 9

used in MEMS, additional materials- silicon compounds (SiO2, SiC,
Si3N4), polycrystalline silicon, gallium arsenide, quartz, piezoelectric
crystals, conductive polymers.
Packaging and Integration: Glass encapsulation, MEMS process
integration strategies.
Advanced Fabrication Techniques: Surface micromachining: sacrificial
layer processes, micro motors, bulk micromachining- micro needles,
micro nozzles, etching techniques-dry etching, plasma etching, wet

2 etching. 9
High Aspect-Ratio Processes: LIGA process, Deep Reactive Ion Etching
(DRIE), thin film deposition-chemical Vapor Deposition (CVD), Physical
Vapor Deposition (PVD), evaporation and sputtering.
 Mechanical Concepts in MEMS: Crystal planes and orientation, internal
force analysis, mechanical properties of silicon and related thin films,
flexural beam bending analysis, torsional deflections, spring constant and

3 resonant frequency. 9
Electrical Concepts in MEMS: Semiconductor materials, calculation of
charge carrier concentration, conductivity and resistivity of
semiconductors.
Sensing Techniques: Electrostatic sensors, thermal sensors, piezoresistive
sensors, piezoelectric sensors.
Actuation Techniques: Thermal forces, shape memory alloys,
piezoelectric crystals, electrostatic forces (parallel plate, torsion bar, comb
4 9
drive actuators), micromechanical motors and pumps.
Case Studies of MEMS: MEMS inertial sensors in automobiles (airbag
deployment, automobile navigation), MEMS vibratory gyroscopes,
MEMS accelerometers, MEMS devices in commercial applications.

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

● 2 Questions from each ● Each question carries 9 marks.
module. ● Two questions will be given from each module, out
● Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
60
carrying 3 marks ● Each question can have a maximum of 3
subdivisions.
(8x3 =24 marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
Explain the fundamental principles, characteristics of MEMS in
CO1 K2
various engineering and technology fields.

CO2 Demonstrate various MEMS fabrication techniques. K2

CO3 Explain mechanical and electrical concepts specific to MEMS. K2
CO4 Apply various MEMS sensors and actuators in real world scenarios. K3
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 - - - - - - - - - - 2

CO2 3 - - - - - - - - - - 2

3 3 - - - - - - - - - 2
CO3

CO4 3 3 2 - - - - - - - - 2

Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books

Name of the Edition

Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
2nd Ed.,
1 Foundation of MEMS Chang Liu Pearson Education
2011

MEMS and Microsystems McGraw Hill 1st Ed.,

2 Tai Ran Hsu
Design and Manufacture Education 2017

Microsensors Mems and Smart Julian W. Gardner, Vijay 1st Ed.,

3 Wiley India Pvt Ltd
Devices K Varadan 2013
 Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
MEMS Materials and 1st Ed.,
1 Reza Ghodssi, Pinyen Lin Springer
Processes Handbook 2011
Markku Tilli, Mervi Paulasto-
Handbook of Silicon Based
Kröckel, Matthias Petzold, Horst 3rd Ed.,
2 MEMS Materials and Elsevier
Theuss, Teruaki Motooka, Veikko 2020
Technologies
Lindroos

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/117/105/117105082/
Link ID
https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/108/106/108106165/
 SEMESTER S5

DATA STRUCTURE ALGORITHMS

Course Code PEPET523 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week (L:
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
T:P: R)
Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.
Prerequisites (if any) None Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. To familiarize the fundamental concepts of data structures and algorithms.

2. To enable the students to analyse basic algorithms for problem-solving.
SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Basic algorithm analysis: Time and space complexity, big O notation,
arrays- definition, operations and applications, linked lists- singly and
1
doubly linked lists, basic operations on linked lists, insertion, deletion,
9
traversal.
Stacks- definition, operations, and applications, queues- definition,
operations, and applications, implementation of stacks and queues using
arrays and linked lists.
2
Basic tree concepts- definitions, terminologies, and properties, Binary
9
trees- representation and basic operations, Binary Search Trees (BST)-
insertion, deletion, and searching.
Basic graph concepts: Definitions, terminologies, and representations,
graph traversal algorithms- Depth-First Search (DFS) and Breadth-First

3 Search (BFS). 9
Shortest path algorithms- Dijkstra’s and Floyd-Warshall algorithms.
minimum spanning tree algorithms- Prim’s and Kruskal’s algorithms.
Sorting algorithms: Bubble sort, selection sort, insertion sort, searching
algorithms- linear search, binary search, analysis and comparison of

4 sorting and searching algorithms. 9

Introduction to dynamic programming and greedy algorithms, simple
examples and applications.
 Course Assessment Method
(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written)

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

● 2 Questions from each ● Each question carries 9 marks.
module. ● Two questions will be given from each module,
● Total of 8 Questions, each out of which 1 question should be answered.
60
carrying 3 marks ● Each question can have a maximum of 3
subdivisions.
(8x3 =24 marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)

Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
CO1 Explain the fundamentals of data structures. K2
CO2 Identify the algorithms applicable to the given context. K3
Apply fundamental data structures and algorithms to solve simple K3
CO3
engineering problems.

CO4 Identify the relevant algorithms for sorting and searching applications. K3
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create
 CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 3 1 - 3 - - - - - - 2
CO2 3 3 2 - 3 - - - - - - 2
CO3 3 3 3 - 3 - - - - - - 2
CO4 3 3 3 - 3 - - - - - - 2
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Name of the Edition and
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher Year

1 The Algorithm Design Manual Steven S Skiena Springer 2nd Ed., 2008

Thomas H Cormen,
Charles E Leiserson,
2 Introduction to Algorithms MIT Press 4th Ed., 2022
Ronald L Rivest, Clifford
Stein
Robert Sedgewick and Addison
3 Algorithms 4th Ed., 2009
Kevin Wayne Wesley
Roberto Tamassia,
Data Structures and Algorithms in
4 Michael H Goldwasser, Wiley 1st Ed., 2013
Python
Michael T Goodrich

Reference Books
Name of the Edition and
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher Year
Henry Holt and
1 Algorithms to Live By Tom Griffiths 1st Ed., 2016
Co
Designing Data-Intensive
Applications: The Big Ideas
2 Martin Kleppmann Shroff/O'Reilly 1st Ed., 2017
Behind Reliable, Scalable, and
Maintainable Systems

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

Link ID https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/106/102/106102064/
 SEMESTER S5

LOGISTICS & SUPPLY CHAIN ENGINEERING

Course Code PEPET524 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) None Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. To enable the students to identify problems and solutions in supply chains.

2. To make the students find and solve problems related to logistics management.

SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Supply Chain: Objectives, structures, decision phases, performance
measures, strategic fit, drivers and metrics. Design of distribution
networks and models for facility location and layout decisions. Major

1 features of postponement, mass customisation, supply chain 9

restructuring, lean, agile, leagile, resilient, dual channel and
international supply chains.
Forecasting and aggregate planning models for supply chains.
Inventory planning in supply chain: Cycle inventory models, discounting
models, multi-item inventory models and production-consumption models
related to supply chains including multi-echelon systems. Safety inventory

2 models for continuous review and periodic review cases of single and
multi-items with probabilistic demand including for multi echelon supply 9
chains. Models, tools and techniques related to optimal level of product
availability, bullwhip effect and risk pooling.
Logistics management: Design options in logistics/transportation network,
trade-offs, risk management, 3PL, 4PL and 5PL. Methods and techniques

3 for allocation, routing, scheduling and sequencing in transportation. 9

Formulation and solution of vehicle routing problems with quantitative
examples.
 Advanced logistics models: Mathematical formulation and solution of
multi-stage transportation problems included with node capacities.
Advanced logistics decision models including bin packing problems, fixed
4
charge problems and knapsack problems. Methods, models and tools 9
related to reverse, closed loop and green logistics in uncertain situations
like pandemic and disaster scenarios.

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal Examination-

Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written)

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

● 2 Questions from each ● Each question carries 9 marks.
module. ● Two questions will be given from each module, out of
● Total of 8 Questions, each which 1 question should be answered.
60
carrying 3 marks ● Each question can have a maximum of 3
subdivisions.
(8x3 =24 marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)
Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
CO1 Understand the general features and design of supply chain networks. K2
CO2 Apply techniques and models on inventory decisions in supply chains. K3
CO3 Understand tools and models on logistics network decisions. K2
CO4 Apply techniques and models on different logistics scenarios. K3
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create
 CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 2 1 1 - - - - - - - - 2
CO2 2 3 3 - - - - - - - - 2
CO3 2 1 1 - - - - - - - - 2
CO4 2 3 3 - - - - - - - - 2
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Supply Chain Management
1 Strategy, Planning and Chopra S, Meindl P Pearson Education 6th Ed., 2016
Operation
Quantitative Models in
2nd Ed.,
2 Operations and Supply Srinivasan G Prentice Hall India
2018
Chain Management

Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Logistical Management: The
1st Ed.,
1 Integrated Supply Chain Bowersox D J, Closs D J McGraw Hill
2017
Process
Logistics and supply chain 4th Ed.,
2 Christopher M Pearson Education
management, 2011
2nd Ed.,
3 Supply Chain Management Shah J Pearson Education
2016
Manufacturing Operations and Vikas 1st Ed.,
4 Taylor D, Brunt D
Supply Chain Management Thomson Learning 2009

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/110/106/110106045/
Link ID
https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/110/105/110105141/
 SEMESTER S5

DESIGN OF EXPERIMENTS AND STATISTICAL ANALYSIS

Course Code PEPET525 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 5/3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) None Course Type Theory

Course Objective:

1. To familiarize with experimental design techniques that are applied to the data analysis
process.
SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Introduction to design of experiments: Experimentation strategy, basic
principles and application, simple comparative experiments, experiments
9
1 with single factor analysis of variance- adequacy checking and
interpretation of results, determination of sample size, random effect
model, regression approach to analysis of variance.
Factorial experimentation: Factorial design, two factor factorial design-
model adequacy checking, model parameters, sample size estimation, no 9
2
interaction assumptions, general factorial design. 22 factorial design, 23
factorial design, introduction to 2K design.
Fitting regression models: Linear regression, estimation of parameters,
multiple regression, hypothesis testing, confidence intervals, random
9
3 effect model introduction, response surface method, method of steepest
ascent, analysis of second order response surface, experimental design for
first and second order models.
Experiments with random factors: Random effect models, two factor
factorial with random factor, two factor mixed model, rules for expected
9
4 mean square, approximate F-Test, nested design, statistical analysis,
diagnostic checking, variance components, staggered nested designs,
design with both nested and factorial factors.
 Course Assessment Method
(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal
Attendance Analyse Evaluate Total
Examination

5 15 10 10 40

Criteria for Assessment (Analyse and Evaluate): 20 marks

Phases Assessment Criteria Marks

Problem Definition
a. Clearly defines the real-world quality issue. 5
b. Examine and identify relevant contextual
factors.
Analyse Problem Analysis
a. Present a structured realistic solution 5
methodology.
b. Compare and justify the proposed solutions
with evidence and logical reasoning
Validation of Results
a. Thoroughly evaluate the proposed solutions.
b. Compares trade-offs, advantages, and 5
disadvantages.
c. Considers feasibility, scalability, and practical
Evaluate implications.
Conclusion and Report Writing
a. Summarizes procedure, findings and insights,
limitation, and scope for future work. 5
b. Preparation of Report with all components of
project report.
 End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

● 2 Questions from each ● Each question carries 9 marks.

module. ● Two questions will be given from each module, out
● Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
carrying 3 marks ● Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub 60
divisions.
(4x9 = 36 marks)
(8x3 = 24 marks)

Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
Demonstrate the role of statistical methods in design and analysis of
CO1 K2
experiments.

CO2 Apply the factorial design concepts to solve engineering problems. K3

Develop various models based on the experimental data related to the
CO3 K3
given problems.

CO4 Analyze the experimental data based on relevant parameters. K4

Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyze, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

3 2 1 1 - - - - - - - 3
CO1
3 2 1 2 - - - - - - - 3
CO2
3 2 - 3 2 - - - - - - 3
CO3
3 2 1 1 - - - - - - - 3
CO4
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation
 Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Design and Analysis of 8th Ed.,
1 Douglas C Montgomery Wiley India Pvt Ltd
Experiments 2013
Applied Multivariate R A Johnson D W, 6th Ed.,
2 PHI Learning Ptl Ltd
Statistical Analysis Wichersn 2020
Optimal Design of 1st Ed.,
3 Peter Goos, Bradley Jones John Wiley & Sons
Experiments 2011

Reference Books
Sl. Name of the Name of the Edition and
Title of the Book
No Author/s Publisher Year
Design of Experiments for Engineers 3rd Ed.,
1 Jiju Antony Elsevier Publications
and Scientist 2023
Design of Experiments: Statistical
Duxbury/Thomson 2nd Ed.,
2 Principles of Research Design and R O Kuehl
Learning, 2000 2000
Analysis

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

Link ID https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/110/105/110105087/
 SEMESTER S5

INDUSTRIAL INSPECTION AND QUALITY CONTROL LAB

Course Code PCPEL507 CIE Marks 50

Teaching Hours/Week (L:

0:0:3:0 ESE Marks 50
T:P: R)

Credits 2 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) None Course Type Lab

Course Objectives:

1. To train students for accurate measurement and analysis of various parameters manufactured
components.
2. To provide students with hands-on experience in quality control processes and techniques.

Expt. No. Experiments (Minimum 10 Experiments should be completed)

1 Measurement of bore diameter using 2 – ball method and 4-ball method

2 Measurement of gear tooth profile using gear tooth vernier

3 Measurement of straightness and flatness using Autocollimator

4 Measurement of angle using sine bar

5 Measurement of screw thread and cutting tool angles using profile projector and tool makers
microscope
6 Measurement of dimensional and geometrical features using CMM

7 Measurement of surface parameters using Talysurf

8 Calibration of LVDT

9 Measurement of force using load cell

10 Construction and interpretation of P chart from measurements.

11 Construction and interpretation of nP chart from measurements.

12 Construction and interpretation of X and R charts from measurements

13 Construction and interpretation of C chart from measurements.

 14 Construction and interpretation of OC Curve.

15 Experiment on acceptance sampling.

16 Experiments to measure process capability of a process

17 Experiments on work study and standard time calculation.

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 50 marks, ESE: 50 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Preparation/Pre-Lab Work experiments,

Viva and Timely Internal
Attendance Total
completion of Lab Reports / Record Examination
(Continuous Assessment)
5 25 20 50

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE):

Procedure/ Conduct of experiment/ Result with valid

Preparatory Execution of work/ inference/ Viva
Record Total
work/Design/ troubleshooting/ Quality of voce
Algorithm Programming Output
10 15 10 10 5 50
● Submission of Record: Students shall be allowed for the end semester examination only upon
submitting the duly certified record.

● Endorsement by External Examiner: The external examiner shall endorse the record

Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
CO1 Apply the competence in linear, angular and force measurements. K3
CO2 Identify the gear and thread parameters of industrial products. K3
CO3 Experiment with surface roughness and geometric parameters. K3
CO4 Construct and analyse various quality control charts. K4
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create
 CO- PO Mapping (Mapping of Course Outcomes with Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 2 2 2 - - - - - 2 - 2

CO2 3 2 2 2 - - - - - 2 - 2

CO3 3 2 2 2 - - - - - 2 - 2

CO4 3 2 2 2 - - - - - 2 - 2
1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Name of the Edition and
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher Year
Engineering Metrology and N V Raghavendra, 1st Ed.,
1 Oxford University Press
Measurements L Krishnamurthy 2013.
Introduction to Statistical Quality 7th Ed.,
2 Douglas C Montgomery John Wiley & Sons
Control 2012.

Reference Books
Name of the Edition and
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher Year
1 The Physics of Metrology Alex Hebra Springer Vienna 1st Ed., 2010
Springer International
2 Mechanical Measurements S P Venkateshan 2nd Ed., 2021
Publishing
A Textbook Of Engineering Dhanpat Rai
3 I C Gupta 8th Ed., 2018
Metrology Publications.
22nd Ed.,
4 Engineering Metrology R K Jain Khanna Publishers
2022
5 Total Quality Management P N Mukherjee Prentice Hall India 1st Ed., 2006
Total Quality Management Sunil Luthra, Dixit Garg,
6 (TQM) - Principles, Methods, and Ashish Agarwal, Sachin K CRC Press 1st Ed., 2020
Applications Mangla
7 Statistical Quality Control Mahajan M Dhanpat Rai & Co. 2nd Ed., 2016
A L Grant and R S
8 Quality Control and Improvement McGraw-Hill 7th Ed., 1996
Leavenworth
Introduction to Industrial Avraham Shtub, Yuval
9 Taylor and Francis 2nd Ed.,2017
Engineering Cohen
Continuous Assessment (25 Marks)
1. Preparation and Pre-Lab Work (7 Marks)

● Pre-Lab Assignments: Assessment of pre-lab assignments or quizzes that test understanding

of the upcoming experiment.
● Understanding of Theory: Evaluation based on students’ preparation and understanding of
the theoretical background related to the experiments.
2. Conduct of Experiments (7 Marks)

● Procedure and Execution: Adherence to correct procedures, accurate execution of

experiments, and following safety protocols.
● Skill Proficiency: Proficiency in handling equipment, accuracy in observations, and
troubleshooting skills during the experiments.
● Teamwork: Collaboration and participation in group experiments.

3. Lab Reports and Record Keeping (6 Marks)

● Quality of Reports: Clarity, completeness and accuracy of lab reports. Proper documentation
of experiments, data analysis and conclusions.
● Timely Submission: Adhering to deadlines for submitting lab reports/rough record and
maintaining a well-organized fair record.

4. Viva Voce (5 Marks)

● Oral Examination: Ability to explain the experiment, results and underlying principles
during a viva voce session.

Final Marks Averaging: The final marks for preparation, conduct of experiments, viva,
and record are the average of all the specified experiments in the syllabus.

Evaluation Pattern for End Semester Examination (50 Marks)

1. Procedure/Preliminary Work/Design/Algorithm (10 Marks)

● Procedure Understanding and Description: Clarity in explaining the procedure and

understanding each step involved.
● Preliminary Work and Planning: Thoroughness in planning and organizing
materials/equipment.
 ● Algorithm Development: Correctness and efficiency of the algorithm related to the
experiment.
● Creativity and logic in algorithm or experimental design.

2. Conduct of Experiment/Execution of Work/Programming (15 Marks)

● Setup and Execution: Proper setup and accurate execution of the experiment or
programming task.

3. Result with Valid Inference/Quality of Output (10 Marks)

● Accuracy of Results: Precision and correctness of the obtained results.

● Analysis and Interpretation: Validity of inferences drawn from the experiment or quality
of program output.

4. Viva Voce (10 Marks)

● Ability to explain the experiment, procedure results and answer related questions
● Proficiency in answering questions related to theoretical and practical aspects of the
subject.

5. Record (5 Marks)

● Completeness, clarity, and accuracy of the lab record submitted

 SEMESTER S5

PUMPS AND PRIME MOVERS LAB

Course Code PCPEL508 CIE Marks 50

Teaching Hours/Week
0:0:3:0 ESE Marks 50
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 2 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) None Course Type Lab

Course Objectives:

1. To provide students with hands-on training in the working of motors, generators and micro
controllers.
2. To equip students with practical knowledge in operating different types of pumps, turbines
and IC engines.

Expt.
Experiments
No.
PART-A (Minimum 5 Experiments should be completed)
1 Perform characteristic tests on induction motors.
2 Perform characteristic tests on DC motors.
3 Perform characteristic tests on DC generators.
4 Explain the speed control of the DC motor.
5 Develop programs to interface stepper motors with 8051 microcontrollers.
6 Develop assembly language programs for simple tasks using 8085 microprocessor kit.
PART-B (Minimum 5 Experiments should be completed)
1 Performance testing of Pelton turbine.
2 Performance testing of Francis /Kaplan turbines.
3 Determination of performance characteristics of single and multi-stage centrifugal pumps.
4 Determination of performance characteristics of reciprocating pumps.
5 Performance analysis of a four-stroke diesel engine.
6 Performance analysis of a two-stroke engine.
 Course Assessment Method
(CIE: 50 marks, ESE: 50 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Preparation/Pre-Lab Work
experiments, Viva and Timely Internal
Attendance Total
completion of Lab Reports / Record Examination
(Continuous Assessment)
5 25 20 50

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE):

Procedure/ Conduct of experiment/ Result with

Preparatory Execution of work/ valid inference/ Viva
Record Total
work/Design/ troubleshooting/ Quality of Voce
Algorithm Programming Output
10 15 10 10 5 50
● Submission of Record: Students shall be allowed for the end semester examination only upon
submitting the duly certified record.

● Endorsement by External Examiner: The external examiner shall endorse the record

Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcomes Knowledge
Level (KL)
Identify the operation characteristics and to estimate the efficiency of various
CO1 K3
electrical machines
Apply the interfacing techniques and control algorithms for stepper motors in
CO2 K3
embedded systems.

CO3 Explain the working principles of different types of pumps and prime movers. K2
Analyze performance tests on pumps and prime movers and analyze the
CO4 K4
results.
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create
 CO- PO Mapping (Mapping of Course Outcomes with Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 2 - 2 - - - - 3 1 - 3
CO2 3 2 - 2 - - - - 3 1 - 3

CO3 3 2 - 3 - - - - 3 1 - 3

CO4 3 3 - 2 - - - - 3 1 - 3
1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Electric Drives: Concepts and McGraw Hill 2nd Ed.,
1 Vedam Subrahmanyam
Applications Education 2017
McGraw Hill 4th Ed.,
2 Power Plant Engineering P K Nag
Education 2017

Reference Books
Edition
Name of the
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s and
Publisher
Year0
Electric Motor Drives:
Pearson Education 1st Ed.,
1 Modeling, Analysis, and R Krishnan
India 2015
Control
McGraw Hill 4th Ed.,
2 Internal Combustion Engines V Ganesan
Education 2017
Continuous Assessment (25 Marks)
1. Preparation and Pre-Lab Work (7 Marks)

● Pre-Lab Assignments: Assessment of pre-lab assignments or quizzes that test understanding

of the upcoming experiment.
● Understanding of Theory: Evaluation based on students’ preparation and understanding of
the theoretical background related to the experiments.
2. Conduct of Experiments (7 Marks)

● Procedure and Execution: Adherence to correct procedures, accurate execution of

experiments, and following safety protocols.
● Skill Proficiency: Proficiency in handling equipment, accuracy in observations, and
troubleshooting skills during the experiments.
● Teamwork: Collaboration and participation in group experiments.
3. Lab Reports and Record Keeping (6 Marks)
● Quality of Reports: Clarity, completeness and accuracy of lab reports. Proper documentation of
experiments, data analysis and conclusions.
● Timely Submission: Adhering to deadlines for submitting lab reports/rough record and maintaining a
well-organized fair record.

4. Viva Voce (5 Marks)

● Oral Examination: Ability to explain the experiment, results and underlying principles during a viva
voce session.
Final Marks Averaging: The final marks for preparation, conduct of experiments, viva,
and record are the average of all the specified experiments in the syllabus.
Evaluation Pattern for End Semester Examination (50 Marks)
1. Procedure/Preliminary Work/Design/Algorithm (10 Marks)
● Procedure Understanding and Description: Clarity in explaining the procedure and understanding
each step involved.
● Preliminary Work and Planning: Thoroughness in planning and organizing materials/equipment.
● Algorithm Development: Correctness and efficiency of the algorithm related to the experiment.
● Creativity and logic in algorithm or experimental design.

2. Conduct of Experiment/Execution of Work/Programming (15 Marks)

● Setup and Execution: Proper setup and accurate execution of the experiment or programming task.
3. Result with Valid Inference/Quality of Output (10 Marks)
● Accuracy of Results: Precision and correctness of the obtained results.
● Analysis and Interpretation: Validity of inferences drawn from the experiment or quality of program
output.
4. Viva Voce (10 Marks)
● Ability to explain the experiment, procedure results and answer related questions
● Proficiency in answering questions related to theoretical and practical aspects of the subject.

5. Record (5 Marks)
● Completeness, clarity, and accuracy of the lab record submitted
SEMESTER 6
PRODUCTION ENGINEERING
 SEMESTER: S6

OPERATIONS RESEARCH AND PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

Course Code PCPET601 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:1:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 4 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Mins.

Prerequisites (if any) None Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. To enable students to use quantitative methods and techniques for effective decision
making.
2. To familiarise the students with production/operations management.
SYLLABUS
Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Basics of operations research(OR): Operation research models, solving the
OR model, queuing and simulation models, art of modelling, phases of OR
study.
Modelling with linear programming(LP): two variable LP models, graphical
1 11
LP solution, linear programming applications.
Simplex method and sensitivity analysis: LP model, simplex method,
Artificial starting solution, special cases in simplex method, sensitivity
analysis, Duality and post-optimal analysis
Transportation Model: Definition, non-traditional transportation models,
transportation algorithm, assignment model - Hungarian method.
Queuing theory: Markovian queue models, single server & multiple server

2 models. 11
Game theory: Practical application of game theory, two–person, zero - sum
games, solution with and without saddle point, rules of dominance, other
solution methods.
Concepts of production and operations management (POM): Introduction,

3 objectives, functions and scope of POM, types of production systems, 11

historical evolution of POM, productivity, factors affecting productivity,
 recent trends in POM, competitiveness and operations strategies.
Demand forecasting: Types of forecasting, demand patterns, forecasting
models including moving average(simple and weighted), single exponential
smoothing, double exponential smoothing, and regression techniques,
measures of forecast accuracy.
Aggregate planning and master production scheduling: Basic strategies for
meeting uneven demand, techniques for aggregate planning, master
scheduling.
Inventory management: Functions of inventory, inventory problem

4 classification, selective inventory control, continuous review and periodic 11

review inventory control systems, deterministic models, quantity discount,
economic order quantity.
Material requirement planning (MRP): Concepts, MRP calculations, lot
sizing in MRP, MRP-II, ERP, JIT and Lean Operations.

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40
End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

● 2 Questions from each ● Each question carries 9 marks.
module. ● Two questions will be given from each module, out
● Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
carrying 3 marks ● Each question can have a maximum of 3 60
subdivisions.
(8x3 = 24 marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcomes Knowledge
Level (KL)
CO1 Solve decision problems using linear programming. K3
Solve transportation, assignment and queuing models; solve problems
CO2 K3
using game theory.
Explain the concepts of production and operations management; apply
CO3 K3
demand forecasting models to solve practical problems.

CO4 Develop production plans and inventory policies. K3

Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 3 3 3 2 - - - - - - 3

CO2 3 3 3 3 2 - - - - - - 3

CO3 2 2 2 - - - - - - - - 3

CO4 3 2 2 - - - - - - - - 3

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Operations Research: An 10th Ed.,
1 Hamdy A Taha Pearson/Prentice Hall
Introduction 2019
2 Operations Management William J Stevenson McGraw Hill 14th Ed.,
2022

Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

 Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Introduction to operations Federick S Hiller , 9th Ed.,
1 Tata McGraw-hill
search Gerald J Lieberman 2010
2nd Ed.,
2 Operations research P Rama Murthy New Age
2007
2nd Ed.,
3 Operations research G. Srinivasan PHI
2010
Production and operations 2nd Ed.,
4 R. B. Khanna PHI
management 2015
Production and operations 3rd Ed.,
5 R. Panneerselvam PHI
management 2012
Norman Gaither and 9th Ed.,
6 Operations management Cengage Learning
Greg Frazier 2004
Everett E. Adam, Jr. and
Production and operations 5th Ed.,
7 Ronald J. Ebert PHI
management 2009
Modern production\ operations Elwood S. Buffa and 8th Ed.,
8 John Wiley and Sons
management Rakesh K, Sarin 2007

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

https://nptel.ac.in/courses/110106062
Link ID
https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/110/107/110107141/
 SEMESTER: S6

METAL FORMING AND TOOL DESIGN

Course Code PCPET602 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Mins.

Prerequisites (if any) None Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. To familiarize the principles and mechanics of metal forming processes.

2. To enable the students to design tools and dies for different engineering applications.

SYLLABUS
Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Characteristics of metal forming and applications: Classification of metal
forming processes according to stresses, theory of plastic deformation, strain
hardening, effect of temperature, composition and strain rates on metal
forming, recovery, recrystallization and grain growth, characteristics and
applications of hot working and cold working.
Compressive forming: Working principle, characteristic features, capabilities
1 9
and application of processes like, rolling, forging and extrusion.
Combined tensile and compressive forming: Working principle,
characteristic features, capabilities and application of processes like, wire
drawing, tube drawing, deep drawing or cupping and redrawing, spinning,
friction and lubrication in metal forming. Common defects in metal forming,
Erichsen cupping test.
Forming by bending: Working principle, characteristic features, capabilities
and applications-V-bend, U-bend, roll bending, straightening, bend
allowance and bend length, spring back in bending and methods to counter
2 spring back, defects in bending and remedies. 9
Forming by shearing: Working principle, characteristic features, capabilities
and applications - blanking, punching, notching, mechanism of shearing,
punch & die design for blanking and punching, operations, estimation of
 shearing load and press capacity, efficient utilization of sheet.
High energy rate forming processes: Working principle, characteristic
features, process variables, capabilities and applications of processes like
explosive forming, hydroforming, magneto forming etc.
Jigs, fixtures and gauge design: Limits, fits and tolerances, limit gauge
design, geometric tolerances, methods for verification of straightness, and
flatness in machine tools, use of interferometry in straightness, and flatness
3 measurements. 9
Different types of locating and clamping devices: Basic principles of location
and design, locating methods and devices, basic principles of clamping,
classification of jigs and fixtures and their applications.
Design of plastic moulding dies: Plastic materials, shrinkage, two and three
plate mould design, standard mould plates, parting line, core and cavity
generation, runner and gate design, mould cooling, ejection methods, tool
4 9
materials, runner less moulds. Design of blow moulding and extrusion dies.
Design of forging and casting dies: Design considerations for forging,
pressure die casting, powder metallurgy and rubber moulding.

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written)

5 15 10 10 40
 End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

● 2 Questions from each ● Each question carries 9 marks.
module. ● Two questions will be given from each module, out
● Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
carrying 3 marks ● Each question can have a maximum of 3 60
subdivisions.
(8x3 =24 marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)

Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
Apply the metal forming concepts and identify the parameters
CO1 K3
influencing metal forming.
CO2 Identify the principles of the sheet metal working. K3
CO3 Make use of the principles of designing Jigs, fixtures and gauges. K3
CO4 Develop dies for a given engineering application. K3
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 - 2 - - 2 - - - - - 3

CO2 3 - 2 - - 2 - - - - - 3

CO3 3 - 2 - - 2 - - - - - 3

CO4 3 - 2 - - 2 - - - - - 3
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Name of the Edition and
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher Year
Manufacturing Technology:
1 Tata McGraw
Foundry, Forming and Rao P N 5th Ed., 2018
Hill
Welding
V C Goold, George H
2 Tool Design McGraw Hill
LeCain, Cyril 5th Ed., 2017
Education
Donaldson
 Reference Books
Name of the Name of the Edition and
Sl. No Title of the Book
Author/s Publisher Year
PHI Learning Private
1 Manufacturing Processes Kaushish J P 2nd Ed., 2010
Ltd.
Ghosh, Amitabh &
2 Manufacturing Science EWP 2nd Ed., 2010
Mullick
Manufacturing Engineering & Kalpkjian S & Schmid
3 Pearson 7th Ed., 2013
Technology Stevens
DeGarmo’s Materials and Black J T & Kohser John Wiley & Sons, 10th Ed.,
4
Processes in Manufacturing Ronald A Inc. 2007
Fundamentals of Metal New Age
5 Juneja B L 1st Ed., 2007
Forming International (P) Ltd
A Textbook of Production 11th Ed.,
6 P C Sharma S Chand
Engineering 2009
7 Tool Engineering and Design G R Nagpal Khanna Publishers 1st Ed., 2000
McGraw Hill
Machine Tools Handbook:
8 Prakash Hiralal Joshi Education (India) 1st Ed., 2007
Design and Operation
Private Limited
9 Injection Mould Design Pye R G W East-West Press Pvt. 1st Ed., 2000
Literary Licensing,
10 Fundamentals of Tool Design Frank W Wilson 1st Ed., 2012
LLC
John G Nee, William Society of
11 Fundamentals of Tool Design Dufraine, John W Manufacturing 6th Ed., 2010
Evans, Mark Hill Engineers

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/112/107/112107250/
Link ID
https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/107/103/107103012/
 SEMESTER: S6

REFRIGERATION AND AIR CONDITIONING

Course Code PEPET631 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L:T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) None Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. To provide students with a comprehensive understanding of the principles and applications of

refrigeration and air conditioning systems.
2. To familiarise fundamental concepts of refrigeration systems, psychrometry, and air
conditioning system design.

SYLLABUS
Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Introduction to Refrigeration: History, applications, and importance of
refrigeration.
Thermodynamics of Refrigeration: Reversed Carnot cycle, heat pumps,
limitations of the reversed Carnot cycle. Units of Refrigeration: Definition
1 and practical examples. 9
Air Refrigeration Systems: Reversed Joule cycle, aircraft refrigeration
systems (simple, bootstrap and regenerative systems).
Special Refrigeration Systems: Thermoelectric Refrigeration (Peltier Effect),
Magnetic Refrigeration.
Vapour Compression Systems: Simple cycle, representation on T-s and P-h
diagrams, Coefficient of Performance (COP), and methods to improve COP
(superheating, undercooling, liquid suction heat exchanger), cascade
2 systems. 9
Vapour Absorption Systems: Ammonia-water system, Lithium bromide-
water systems, Electrolux systems, comparison with vapour compression
systems and drawbacks.
 Refrigerants: Properties, eco-friendly refrigerants, mixed refrigerants,
selection criteria for different applications, refrigerant leakage detection,
refrigerant charging.
Psychrometry: Properties of air (saturated, unsaturated, dry, wet, dew point,
humidity levels), thermodynamic equations, adiabatic saturation process,
psychrometric charts, processes (sensible heating/cooling,
humidifying/dehumidifying), air washers, bypass factors, sensible heat
factor, RSHF, GSHF.

3 Introduction to ventilation: Fundamentals of good indoor air quality Need for 9

ventilation, Effects of Relative humidity in ventilation, Control of microbial
growth. Types of ventilation system. Supply system - Devices used in supply
systems, Air Inlet system. Filters heating & cooling equipment, Fans, Duct,
Grills, Diffusers Exhaust system General exhaust systems. Removal of
pollutants and contaminated air. Air cleaning devices.
Air Conditioning Systems: Comfort and Industrial air conditioning. Comfort
air conditioning factors, effective temperature, comfort charts, cooling load
estimation, design conditions, supply conditions, fresh air supply,
thermodynamics of the human body.
Applications of Air Conditioning: Room air conditioners, split systems,
4 9
packaged systems, all-air systems, chilled water systems, winter and summer
air conditioning, heating systems, humidifiers, year-round AC system and
controls (thermostat, humidistat), air distribution systems (duct design), air
conditioning for various environments (restaurants, hospitals, retail outlets,
computer centres, theatres, industrial applications).

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written)

5 15 10 10 40
 End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

● 2 Questions from each ● Each question carries 9 marks.
module. ● Two questions will be given from each module, out
● Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
carrying 3 marks ● Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub 60
divisions.
(8x3 = 24 marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)

Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcomes Knowledge
Level (KL)
Explain the basic principles of refrigeration systems and identify their K3
CO1
practical applications.
Make use of vapour compression and vapour absorption refrigeration K3
CO2
systems with suitable refrigerants for various applications.
Explain the concepts of psychrometric processes and illustrate the K2
CO3
principles of ventilation systems.
Make use of the principles of air conditioning systems for various K3
CO4
applications.
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 2 - - 1 2 2 - - - - 1
CO2 3 2 2 - 1 2 2 - - - - 1
CO3 3 - - - 1 2 2 - - - - 1
CO4 3 - 2 - 1 2 2 - - - - 1
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation
 Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Refrigeration and Air Bill Whitman, Bill 8th Edition,
1 Cengage Learning
Conditioning Technology Johnson, John Tomczyk 2023
Refrigeration and Air G.F. Hundy, A.R. Trott, Butterworth- 5th Edition,
2
Conditioning T.C. Welch Heinemann 2021
McGraw Hill 5th Edition,
Refrigeration and Air C.P. Arora
3 Education 2017
Conditioning

Reference Books
Name of the Edition and
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher Year
Andrew D. Althouse,
Modern Refrigeration and Air 21st Edition,
1 Carl H. Turnquist, Alfred Goodheart-Willcox
Conditioning 2022
F. Bracciano
5th Edition,
2 Air Conditioning Engineering W.P. Jones Arnold
2013
Refrigeration and Air
2nd Edition,
3 Conditioning Technology J. Whitfield, P. Dincer CRC Press
2020
Handbook
Handbook of Air Conditioning 3rd Edition,
4 Shan K. Wang McGraw-Hill
and Refrigeration 2017
Practical Guide to Refrigeration Delmar Cengage 2nd Edition,
5 Minnick & Associates
and Air Conditioning Learning 2016
Carter Stanfield, David 3rd Edition,
6 Fundamentals of HVACR Pearson
Skaves 2016
Air Conditioning and Roger A. Fischer, Ken 2nd Edition,
7 McGraw-Hill
Refrigeration Repair Chernoff 2014
Textbook of Refrigeration and 6th Edition,
8 R.K. Rajput S. Chand Publishing
Air Conditioning 2016
Principles of Refrigeration Roy J. Dossat Pearson Education 5th Edition,
9
2019
Air Conditioning Principles and Edward G. Pita Prentice Hall 4th Edition,
10
Systems 2017

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/112/107/112107208/
Link ID
https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112105129
 SEMESTER: S6

FINITE ELEMENT ANALYSIS

Course Code PEPET632 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) None Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. To enable the students to acquire the basic concepts of finite element formulation methods.
2. To familiarise finite element methodologies through simple structural and heat transfer
problems.
SYLLABUS
Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Introduction to finite element method (FEM): FEM as a numerical tool for
design, basic concepts, formulation procedures.
FE modelling direct approach: One dimensional bar element, element
stiffness, assembly of elements, properties of stiffness matrix, treatment of
1 boundary conditions, temperature effects, stress computation, support 9
reaction analogous one dimensional problems of torsion and heat conduction.
Beam element: Beam relationships, one dimensional beam element FE
formulation, element stiffness matrix, load considerations, boundary
conditions, member end forces.
FE modelling Direct approach: Plane truss element formulation, coordinate
transformation, local and global coordinates, element matrices, assembly of
elements, treatment of boundary conditions, stress calculation, simple
2 problems. Convergence requirements, patch test. 9
Variational methods: Functionals, weak and strong form, essential and non-
essential boundary conditions, principle of stationary potential energy,
Rayleigh-Ritz method, simple examples.
Interpolation: Shape function, Lagrange interpolation.

3 FE formulation from virtual work principle: Displacement differentiation 9

matrix [B-matrix], element matrices for bar and constant strain triangle
 element [CST element], load considerations, consistent nodal loads, simple
problems.
Two dimensional FE formulation: Two dimensional steady state heat
conduction, element matrices for a triangular element, boundary conditions,
simple problems. FE formulation for two dimensional stress analysis from
potential energy, element matrices, plane bilinear element.
Weighted residual methods: Galerkin FE formulation, axially loaded bar –
heat flow in a bar.
Isoparametric formulation: Natural coordinates, linear and quadratic bar
4 9
element, linear triangle and plane bilinear elements for scalar fields, jacobian
matrix, element matrices, Gauss quadrature, requirements for isoparametric
elements, accuracy and mesh distortion.

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

● 2 Questions from each ● Each question carries 9 marks.
module. ● Two questions will be given from each module, out
● Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
carrying 3 marks ● Each question can have a maximum of 3 60
subdivisions.
(8x3 = 24 marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcomes Knowledge
Level (KL)
Utilise finite element method for one-dimensional problem formulation
CO1 K3
and develop solution.
Apply the finite element formulation using the truss element method
CO2 K3
and variational methods.
Utilise finite element method for two-dimensional problem formulation
CO3 K3
and develop solution.
Apply weighted residual method and isoparametric formulation in
CO4 K3
finite element analysis.
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 3 2 2 3 - - - - - - 2

CO2 3 3 2 2 3 - - - - - - 2

CO3 3 3 2 2 3 - - - - - - 2

CO4 3 3 2 2 3 - - - - - - 2
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
1 Text book of finite element P Seshu PHI Learning Private 1st Ed.,
analysis Limited New Delhi 2012
2 Finite element analysis S. Senthil Lakshmi publications 3rd Ed.,
Chennai 2013
 Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Finite Element Analysis for 2nd Ed.,
1 T. R. Chandrupatla University Press
Engineering and Technology 2004
Fundamentals of Finite 1st Ed.,
2 D. V. Hutton Tata McGraw Hill
Element Analysis 2005
4th Ed.,
3 Finite Element Analysis S. S. Bhavikatti New Age International
2021

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/112/104/112104193/
Link ID
https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/112/104/112104205/
 SEMESTER: S6

DEEP LEARNING

Course Code PEPET633 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

PEPET413: Machine
Prerequisites (if any) Course Type Theory
learning

Course Objectives:

1. To familiarise with deep learning frameworks and tools.

2. To enable students to implement various deep learning architectures.

SYLLABUS
Module Contact
No.
Syllabus Description Hours
Overview of deep learning and its applications: Differences between
machine learning and deep learning, comparisons in applications.
1 8
Introduction to neural networks: Neurons, layers, activation functions,
concepts of forward and backward propagation.
Overview of popular deep learning frameworks: TensorFlow,
Keras,PyTorch. Setting up the environment and basic operations. Building
and training a simple neural network using TensorFlow/Keras/PyTorch.
2 10
Introduction to deep feedforward networks: Convolutional neural networks
(CNNs) - architecture, operations, and applications, recurrent neural
networks (RNNs) - architecture, operations, and applications.
Data preprocessing and augmentation: Loss functions and optimization
3 algorithms, techniques to avoid overfitting - Regularization, dropout, and 9
batch normalization, identification of suitable algorithms.
Transfer learning and pre-trained models: Generative adversarial networks
(GANs), concepts and applications, autoencoders and their applications in
4 9
anomaly detection and compression. Case studies of deep learning
applications in various industries.
 Course Assessment Method
(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

● 2 Questions from each ● Each question carries 9 marks.
module. ● Two questions will be given from each module, out
● Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
carrying 3 marks ● Each question can have a maximum of 3 60
subdivisions.
(8x3 =24 marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)

Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
CO1 Explain the principles and concepts of deep learning. K2
CO2 Demonstrate the basic and advanced deep learning architectures. K2

CO3 Identify deep learning algorithms for various applications. K3

Utilise the deep learning frameworks and tools for developing K3
CO4
and testing models.
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create
 CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 - - - - 1 2 - - - - 2

CO2 3 - - - - 1 2 - - - - 2

CO3 3 - 3 - - 2 2 - - - - 3

CO4 3 - 3 - - 2 2 - - - - 3
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
1 Deep Learning Ian Goodfellow, Yoshua MIT Press 1st Ed.,
Bengio 2016
2 Deep Learning with Python Francois Chollet Manning Publications 2nd Ed.,
2021
Deep Learning from Scratch:
3 Building with Python from Seth Weidman Shroff/O'Reilly 1st Ed.,
First Principles 2019
Deep Learning for Coders with
4 Fastai and PyTorch: Al Jeremy Howard,Sylvain Shroff/O'Reilly 1st Ed.,
Applications Without a PhD Gugger 2023

Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Generative Deep Learning:
2nd Ed.,
1 Teaching Machines To Paint, David Foster,Karl Friston Shroff/O'Reilly
2019
Write, Compose, and Play
Designing Machine Learning
Systems: An Iterative Process I 1st Ed.,
2 Chip Huyen Shroff/O'Reilly
for Production-Ready 2022
Applications

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/106/106/106106184/
Link ID
https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/106/106/106106201/
 SEMESTER: S6

PLANT LAYOUT AND DESIGN

Course Code PEPET634 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) None Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. To impart knowledge about the facilities planning process, layout and layout design.
2. To introduce the concepts of material handling systems, plant safety and equipment
replacement.
SYLLABUS
Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Introduction to facilities planning: Objectives, selection of site, plant layout -
principles and objectives of good layout, types of layouts - product, process,
fixed position, combination and cellular layouts.
1 9
Layout Design: Major considerations, plant layout procedure, layout design of
factories, office, storage area etc., consideration of working people, storage
facilities and general equipment for amenities.
Systematic layout planning (SLP): Procedure, from-to chart, activity
relationship chart, space relationship diagram. Design of assembly lines, line

2 balancing, simple problems, computer applications in layout designs. 9

Environmental aspects of design: Environmental factors like lighting,
ventilation, dust control and humidity.
Plant safety: Elements of industrial safety, causes and prevention of accidents,
pollution and environmental considerations, considerations for different types
of plant services like steam, compressed air etc.
3 Material handling system and equipment: Material handling in plants, 10
principles of material handling, activities and functions, unit load concept.
stores and warehouses, receiving and dispatching areas, choice of material
handling equipment.
 Material handling cost and economical aspects: Depreciation- methods, simple
problems.

4 Equipment replacement: Repair, replacement based on technical and 8

economical consideration, methods of replacement studies, simple problems,
break-even analysis.

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

● 2 Questions from each ● Each question carries 9 marks.
module. ● Two questions will be given from each module, out
● Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
carrying 3 marks ● Each question can have a maximum of 3 60
subdivisions.
(8x3 =24 marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
CO1 Explain the concepts of facilities planning and layout design. K2
Apply the lay out design concepts in industries and explain plant
CO2 K3
services and environmental aspects of plant design.
Demonstrate the material handling systems and explain the importance
CO3 K2
of safety in industries.
Apply the economical aspects of material handling and equipment
CO4 K3
replacement.
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 - - - - - 2 - - - - 2

CO2 3 - 2 - 1 - 2 - - - - 2

CO3 3 - 2 - - - 2 - - - - 2

CO4 3 - 2 - - - 2 - - - - 2
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
1 Plant Layout and Material James M Apple Krieger Pub Co. 2nd Ed.,
Handling 2011
2 Plant Layout and Materials 1st Ed.,
Pemberton A W John Wiley
Handling 2017
3 Plant Layout and Materials 1st Ed.,
S C Sharma Khanna publishers
Handling 2013
 Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Pearson Education
Facilities Planning and Design Alberto Garcia-Diaz, 1st Ed.,
1 Limited
James MacGregor Smith 2014
1st Ed.,
Plant Layout and Material Prentice Hall
2. Fred E Meyers 1993
Handling

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/112/107/112107292/
Link ID
https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/103/105/103105166/
 SEMESTER: S6

FINANCIAL ENGINEERING
Course Code PEPET635 CIE Marks 40
Teaching Hours/Week ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R) 3:0:0:0

Credits Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

5/3
Prerequisites (if any) Course type Theory
None

Course Objectives:

1. To provide students with knowledge of financial instruments and their application.

2. To equip students with the skills to analyse and manage financial risks.

SYLLABUS
Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Financial markets and instruments: Time value of money and interest
rates, introduction to financial statements and analysis, introduction to

1 financial accounting principles. 9

Overview of Indian accounting standards: Preparation of financial
statements, balance sheet, profit and loss account and cash flow statement.
Fixed Income Securities: Bond pricing and yields, term structure of
interest rates, duration and convexity, introduction to mortgage-backed
securities.
2 Risk management tools and techniques: Types of financial risks - 9
market, credit, operational and liquidity risks, risk - variance &
covariance matrix, correlation matrix & portfolio variance, value at risk
(VaR) and its computation.
Derivatives: Futures and options, pricing of forward and futures contracts,
introduction to option pricing - Binomial model, Black-Scholes model.
3 9
Option Greeks: Volatility smiles and volatility surfaces, hedging strategies
using derivatives, applications in Indian scenario.
Valuation and valuation techniques: Fundamental principle of value
4 creation, risk and cost of capital, ROIC, growth, valuation techniques - 9
enterprise discounted cash flow model, economic profit-based valuation
 models, adjusted-present-value model, capital cash flow model, cash-
flow-to-equity valuation model. Implementation of financial models using
computational tools (Python, R).

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Attendance Internal Ex Evaluate Analyse Total

5 15 10 10 40

Criteria for Evaluation(Evaluate and Analyse): 20 marks

Phases Assessment Criteria Marks

Problem Definition
a. Clearly defines the real-world quality issue.
5
b. Examine and identify relevant contextual
factors.
Problem Analysis
Analyse a. Present a structured realistic solution
5
methodology.
b. Compare and justify the proposed solutions
with evidence and logical reasoning
Validation of Results
a. Thoroughly evaluate the proposed solutions.
b. Compares trade-offs, advantages, and
disadvantages. 5
c. Considers feasibility, scalability, and practical
Evaluate implications

Conclusion and Report Writing

a.Summarizes procedure, findings and insights, 5
limitation and scope for future work.
b.Preparation of report with all components of
project report.
 End Semester Examination Marks (ESE):

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

● 2 Questions from each 2 questions will be given from each module, out of
module. which 1 question should be answered. Each question can
● Total of 8 Questions, each have a maximum of 3 subdivisions. Each question 60
carrying 3 marks carries 9 marks.
(8x3 =24 marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)

Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
Explain the fundamental concepts of financial markets, instruments,
CO1 K2
and their applications
Assess and mitigate financial risks through various hedging strategies
CO2 K3
and risk management tools.
Apply derivative hedging strategies for optimizing investments and
CO3 K3
resources.
Apply valuation and valuation techniques; evaluate the financial
CO4 K4
models developed with computational software.
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 - - - - - - - 2 - 2 2

CO2 3 - 2 - - - - - 2 - 2 2

CO3 3 - 3 - 2 - - - 3 - 2 2

CO4 3 - 3 - 3 - - - 3 - 2 2
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation
 Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year

1 Options, Futures & Other John C. Hull, Sankarshan Pearson Education 10th Ed.,
Derivatives Basu 2018

Valuation: Measuring and McKinsey & Company

2 Wiley 7th Ed.,
Managing the Value of Inc., Tim Koller, Marc
2020
Companies Goedhart

3 Option Volatility and Pricing: Fragile Books 2nd Ed.,

Sheldon Natenberg
Advanced Trading Strategies 2014
Investment Valuation: Tools
4 and Techniques for Wiley 3rd Ed.,
Aswath Damodaran
determining The Value Of 2012
any asset

Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
1st Ed.,
1 Principles of Corporate Finance Richard A. Brealey McGraw Hill
2023
2nd Ed.,
2 Romancing The Balance Sheet Dr Anil Lamba Harper Business
2019
The Psychology of Money:
Jaico Publishing 1st Ed.,
3 Timeless Lessons on Wealth, Morgan Housel
House 2020
Greed, and Happiness

Video Links

Link ID https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/110/104/110104066/
 SEMESTER: S6

IoT AND AUTOMATION

Course Code PBPET604 CIE Marks 60

Teaching Hours/Week
4 ESE Marks 40
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3:0:0:1 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) None Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. To familiarize the pneumatic and hydraulic automation systems, sensors and transducers.
2. To equip students to develop IoT systems and network models.
SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Pneumatic and hydraulic automation: Automation definition, types and
strategies fluid power, hydraulics and pneumatic systems, basic elements,
power pack, basic pneumatic systems.
Rotary pumps and compressors: Gear, lobe and vane pumps, screw, lobe
1 12
and vane compressors, direction control valves, actuators - types of
cylinders and hydraulic motors, direction control valves, circuit
representation using symbols - single and double cylinder circuits, servo
control system.
Electric and electronic controls: Sensors and transducers - classification,
thermocouple, thermistor, photo sensors, inductive sensors, pressure, strain
2 10
and piezoelectric sensors. microprocessor, micro controllers, PLC controller,
PLC Programming.
Internet of Things (IoT): Definition, architecture, applications, wireless
networks, hardwares, event processing, organisation of IoT system,
3 subscriber publish model, protocol, time base and database, device design 11
space, comparison of cost of ownership and power with conventional
systems.
Event driven system analysis: IoT network model, IoT event analysis,
4 Industrial IoT (IIoT), industry 4.0, IIoT architecture, industrial internet 11
consortium, functional domains, RFID, WSN technologies, IIoT
 applications, challenges. System security and application security, ARMET
approach, examples.

Suggestion on Project Topics

● Selection of hydraulic cylinders for specific applications.
● Identification of robotised motion and mapping of the same into multiple
cylinder actuation.
● Design of hydraulic or pneumatic circuits for actuation of multiple cylinders.
● Design of electro- pneumatic circuits for multiple cylinder actuation using ladder
logic diagrams.
● PLC programming for any specific process.
● Design of IoT based systems for automation and comparing with conventional
systems in cost terms.
● It enabled automation of machine operation leading to unmanned operations.

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 60 marks, ESE: 40 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Attendance Project Internal Ex-1 Internal Ex-2 Total

5 30 12.5 12.5 60

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

● 2 Questions from each 2 questions will be given from each module, out of
module. which 1 question should be answered. Each
● Total of 8 Questions, question can have a maximum of 2 subdivisions. 40
each carrying 2 marks Each question carries 6 marks.
(8x2 =16 marks) (4x6 = 24 marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
Develop automated solution for operations using hydraulic and K3
CO1
pneumatic actuators
Develop automated solutions for moderately complex operations using K3
CO2
PLC programming
CO3 Apply IoT based systems for specific industrial operations K3
Develop data capturing systems and implement industry 4.0 for shop K3
CO4
floor operations

Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 2 - 2 - - - - - - - - 2

CO2 2 - 3 - - - - - - - - 2

CO3 3 - 3 2 - - - 1 1 - - 2

CO4 3 - 3 2 - - - 1 1 - - 2

Text Books
Edition and
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s Name of the Publisher
Year
Industrial Automation and Mercury Learning and 1st Ed.,
1 A K Gupta & S K Arora
Robotics Information 2013
Internet-of-Things (IoT)
1st Ed.,
2 Systems: Architectures, D S Mariyne Wolf Springer
2018
Algorithms, Methodologies
Automation, Production
4th Ed.,
3 Systems, and Computer- Mikell P Groover Pearson
2014
Integrated Manufacturing
Shriram K V, Abhishek
2nd Ed.,
4 Internet of Things S. Nagarajan & R. M. John Wiley Pubs
2020
D. Sundaram
 Reference Books
Edition and
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s Name of the Publisher
Year
Robotics automation and
1st Ed.,
1 control in industrial service Zong wei Luo IGI Global
2015
setting
John Wiley & Sons 1st Ed.,
2 Designing the internet of things Adrian, M. and Hakim C
Inc 2013

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/106/105/106105195/
Link ID
https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/106/105/106105166/

PBL Course Elements

L: Lecture R: Project (1 Hr.), 2 Faculty Members

(3 Hrs.) Tutorial Practical Presentation
Simulation/ Presentation
Lecture delivery Project identification Laboratory Work/ (Progress and Final
Workshops Presentations)
Group discussion Project Analysis Data Collection Evaluation
Question answer Project Milestone Reviews,
Sessions/ Analytical thinking and
Testing Feedback,
Brainstorming self-learning
Project reformation (If required)
Sessions
Poster Presentation/
Guest Speakers
Case Study/ Field Video Presentation: Students
(Industry Prototyping
Survey Report present their results in a 2 to 5
Experts)
minutes video

Assessment and Evaluation for Project Activity

Sl. No Evaluation for Allotted

Marks
1 Project Planning and Proposal 5
2 Contribution in Progress Presentations and Question Answer 4
Sessions
3 Involvement in the project work and Team Work 3
4 Execution and Implementation 10
5 Final Presentations 5
6 Project Quality, Innovation and Creativity 3
Total 30
1. Project Planning and Proposal (5 Marks)

● Clarity and feasibility of the project plan

● Research and background understanding
● Defined objectives and methodology

2. Contribution in Progress Presentation and Question Answer Sessions (4 Marks)

● Individual contribution to the presentation

● Effectiveness in answering questions and handling feedback

3. Involvement in the Project Work and Team Work (3 Marks)

● Active participation and individual contribution

● Teamwork and collaboration

4. Execution and Implementation (10 Marks)

● Adherence to the project timeline and milestones

● Application of theoretical knowledge and problem-solving
● Final Result

5. Final Presentation (5 Marks)

● Quality and clarity of the overall presentation

● Individual contribution to the presentation
● Effectiveness in answering questions

6. Project Quality, Innovation, and Creativity (3 Marks)

● Overall quality and technical excellence of the project

● Innovation and originality in the project

● Creativity in solutions and approaches

 SEMESTER S6

DESIGN THINKING AND PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT

(Common to Group C & Group D)

Course Code GZEST605 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
2:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 2 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) None Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. To guide students through the iterative stages of design thinking, including empathizing with
users, defining problems, ideating solutions and developing Proof of Concepts (PoC) and
technical feasibility studies.

2. To promote the development of critical thinking skills by engaging students in integrative

inquiry, where they ask meaningful questions that connect classroom knowledge with real-
world applications.

3. To equip students with the ability to involve in product design considering the sustainability,
inclusivity, diversity and equity aspects.

SYLLABUS
Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Fundamentals of design thinking and product development: Overview of
stages of product development lifecycle; Design thinking -Definition-Design
thinking for product innovation; Bringing social impact in ideation-
Identifying societal needs-understanding multi-faceted issues-community
engagement and empathetic design- technological innovation meeting

1 societal needs; Understanding and Bridging the divide using Human 6

Centered Design (HCD); Designing for inclusivity in product development-
embracing user diversity - Long term impact - sustainability encompassing
environmental,economic and social dimensions; Technology Readiness
Level in the Innovation Life-cycle; Performing a self-check on innovative
ideas - Originality of idea- understanding innovation landscape -
 patentability - understanding the economic landscape - Unique Selling
Proposition (USP) - Repeatability and Manufacturability - Sustainability -
Leveraging business models for comprehensive analysis
Empathize: Design thinking phases; Role of empathy in design thinking;
Methods of empathize phase - Ask 5 Why/ 5 W+H questions; Empathy
maps - Things to be done prior to empathy mapping - Activities during and
after the session; Understanding empathy tools - Customer Journey Map -
2 6
Personas.

Define: Methods of Define Phase: Storytelling, Critical items diagrams,

Define success.
Ideation : Stages of ideation; Techniques and tools - Divergent thinking
tools - Convergent thinking tools - Idea capturing tools; Cross-industry
inspiration; Role of research in ideation - Market research - consumer
research - leveraging research for informed ideation; Technological trends -
navigating the technological landscape - Integrating emerging technologies;
3 Feasibility studies - technical, economic, market, operational, legal, and 6
ethical feasibility; Ideation session- techniques and tips.

Proof of Concept (PoC) : Setting objectives; Risk assessment; Technology

scouting; Document and process management; Change management;
Knowledge Capture; Validating PoC; Story telling in PoC presentation
Design: Navigating from PoC to detailed design; Developing Specification
Requirement Document (SRD); Design for manufacturability; Design to
cost; Pre-compliance; Design Failure Mode and Effects Analysis (DFMEA);
Forecasting future design changes.

Prototyping: Alpha prototypes; Beta prototypes; Transition from design to

prototype; Goals and expectations for Alpha and Beta prototypes; Effective
4 strategies for maintaining timeline in prototyping; Testing and refining 6
Alpha prototypes; Transitioning to Beta prototypes.

Pilot build: Definition and purpose of a pilot build; setting objectives;

Identification and selection of manufacturing partner for pilot build; Testing
procedures in pilot build; Scaling from pilot build to full-scale production /
implementation.
 Course Assessment Method
(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

 2 Questions from each  Each question carries 9 marks.
module.  Two questions will be given from each module, out
 Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
carrying 3 marks  Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub 60
divisions.
(8x3 =24marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)

Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
Empathize to capture the user needs and define the objectives with due K5
CO1 consideration of various aspects including inclusivity, diversity and
equity
Ideate using divergent and convergent thinking to arrive at innovative K6
CO2 ideas keeping in mind the sustainability, inclusivity, diversity and equity
aspects.
Engage in Human Centric Design of innovative products meeting the K5
CO3
specifications
Develop Proof of Concepts (PoC), prototypes & pilot build of products K4
CO4 and test their performance with respect to the Specification Requirement
Document.
Reflect on professional and personal growth through the learnings in the K4
CO5
course, identifying areas for further development
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create
 CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 2 2 2 3 3 3 2 2 3
CO2 3 2 3 2 3 3 3 2 2 3
CO3 3 2 3 2 3 3 2 2 2 3
CO4 3 2 2 3 3 3 2 2 2 3
CO5 3 3 3 2 2 2 3
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Product Sense: Engineering
1 Dr. K R Suresh Nair NotionPress.com 2024
your ideas into reality
Change by Design: How
Design Thinking Transforms HarperCollins
2 Organizations and Tim Brown 2009
Publishers Ltd.
Inspires Innovation
Design Thinking for Strategic John Wiley & Sons
3 Idris Mootee 2013
Innovation Inc.

Sample Assignments:

1. Evaluate and prepare a report on how the aspects including inclusivity, diversity and equity are taken
into consideration during the empathize and define phases of the Miniproject course.

2. Evaluate and prepare a report on how the aspects including sustainability, inclusivity, diversity and
equity are taken into consideration during the ideate phase of the Miniproject course.

3. Evaluate and prepare a report on how User-Centric Design (UCD) is used in the design and
development of PoC of the product being developed in the Miniproject course.

4. Prepare a plan for the prototype building of the product being developed in the Miniproject course.

5. Report on the activities during the empathize phase including the maps & other materials created
during the sessions.

6. Report on the activities during the define phase including the maps & other materials created during
the sessions.
 SEMESTER: S6

INDUSTRIAL QUALITY CONTROL

Course Code OEPET611 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) None Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. To provide students with a comprehensive understanding of the fundamental principles and

practices of industrial quality control.

2. To equip students with the skills to use advanced statistical methods for quality
improvement and decision-making.

SYLLABUS
Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Introduction to industrial quality control: Quality basics, meaning of quality,
factors affecting quality, quality principles, quality function, quality control:
1 9
aims and objectives of quality control, cost of quality, seven QC tools,
historical perspective of quality control.
Statistical quality control: Introduction, concept of variability, types of
control charts, measurement of control limits, control charts for variables,
2 9
large sample data, warning limits, revised control limits, group control chart,
control chart with line trend.
Control charts for attributes: Control charts for non-conforming models,
control charts for fraction non-conforming, process and measurement system.
3 9
Capability analysis: Using probability plot, process capability ratios,
specification limits and tolerance.
Acceptance sampling: Advantages and disadvantages of sampling methods,
sampling techniques, sampling risks and indices, operating characteristics

4 curves, average outgoing quality limits. 9

Sampling plans: Simple, double, multiple and sequential sampling plans,
tightened inspection, Dodge-Romig system.
 Course Assessment Method
(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

● 2 Questions from each ● Each question carries 9 marks.
module. ● Two questions will be given from each module, out
● Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
carrying 3 marks ● Each question can have a maximum of 3 60
subdivisions.
(8x3 =24 marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)

Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
Demonstrate the fundamental concepts and principles of quality and
CO1 K2
quality control.
Apply statistical methods to construct and interpret control charts for
CO2 K3
variables.
Construct and interpret control charts for attributes, and to identify
CO3 K3
process capability parameters.
Utilize acceptance sampling methods and develop sampling plans to
CO4 K3
enhance quality control processes.
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create
 CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 - - - - 1 - - - - - 2

CO2 3 2 - - - 1 - - - - - 2

CO3 3 2 - - - 1 - - - - - 2

CO4 3 2 - - - 1 - - - - - 2
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
1 Introduction to Statistical Douglas C Montgomery John Wiley & Sons 7th Ed.,
Quality Control 2012
3rd Ed.,
2 Fundamentals of Quality
Amitava Mitra John Wiley & Sons 2008
Control and Improvement

3 1st Ed.,
Statistical Quality Control M Mahajan Dhanpat Rai & Co
2016

Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Quality Control and A L Grant and R S 7th Ed.,
1 McGraw-Hill
Improvement Leavenworth 1996
Statistical Process Control and 5th Ed.,
2 Gerald M Smith Pearson
Quality Improvement 2004

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

Link ID https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/110/105/110105088/
 SEMESTER: S6

INDUSTRIAL ENGINEERING AND PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

Course Code OEPET612 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) None Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. To familiarise students with principles and concepts of Industrial Engineering.

2. To equip students with the concepts of production management and its applications.

SYLLABUS
Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Introduction to industrial engineering – Evolution of modern Concepts in
Industrial Engineering, application of industrial engineering-functions and
role of an industrial engineer.
1 Productivity: Concept and definition, productivity and standard of living, 9
techniques for productivity improvement, importance of work study towards
productivity improvement, measuring productivity of an enterprise,
fractional and multi factor productivity.
Introduction to plant layout: Definition, objective and importance. types of
layout - product, process, fixed position and cellular layout, factors

2 influencing plant layout - material flow, equipment, safety and ergonomics. 9

Material handling: Principles, types of material handling equipment,
selection and applications.
Introduction to production management: Definition, objectives and scope of
production management, types of production systems - job, batch, mass, and
continuous production, emerging trends in production management.
3 9
Inventory management: Functions of inventory, inventory problem
classification, selective inventory control, continuous review and periodic
review inventory control systems, deterministic models, quantity discount,
 economic order quantity.

Planning and control of production management: Demand forecasting -

types of forecasting, demand patterns, forecasting models including moving
average (simple and weighted), exponential smoothing and regression
4 techniques, measures of forecast accuracy. 9
Aggregate planning and master production scheduling: Basic strategies for
meeting uneven demand, techniques for aggregate planning, master
scheduling.

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

● 2 Questions from each ● Each question carries 9 marks.
module. ● Two questions will be given from each module, out
● Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
carrying 3 marks ● Each question can have a maximum of 3 60
subdivisions.
(8x3 =24 marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
CO1 Apply the basic concepts of industrial engineering and productivity. K3
Demonstrate the types of plant layouts and the principles of material
CO2 K2
handling.

CO3 Apply the concepts of production management and inventory models. K3

CO4 Explain the concepts of production planning and control of operations. K2
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 2 - - - 2 - - - - - 2

CO2 3 - - - - 2 - - - - - 2

CO3 2 2 - - - 2 - - - - - 2

CO4 3 - - - - 2 - - - - - 2
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
1 Industrial Engineering and 10th Ed.,
Dr B Kumar Khanna Publishers
management 2004
2 Industrial Engineering and
O P Khanna Danpat Rai publication 2018
management
3 Norman Gaither and 9th Ed.,
Operations management Cengage Learning
Greg Frazier 2004
4 Demand Forecasting for Stephan Kolassa and 1st Ed.,
Business Expert press
Managers Enno Siemsen. 2010
 Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Introduction to Industrial Avraham Shtub, Yuval 2nd Ed.,
1 Taylor and Francis
Engineering Cohen 2017
Production and operations 2nd Ed.,
3 R B Khanna PHI
management 2015
Modern production/operations 8th Ed.,
4 Buffa and Sarin John Wiley and Sons
management 2007

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/112/107/112107292/
Link ID https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/110/107/110107141/
https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/106/105/106105195/
 SEMESTER: S6

ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING

Course Code OEPET 613 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) None Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. To familiarise the students on various aspects and processes of additive manufacturing

technology.
2. To provide a deeper insight on the applications of additive manufacturing.
SYLLABUS
Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Additive manufacturing (AM): Introduction, need for AM, evolution of AM
technologies, steps in AM, types of AM processes, ASTM standard process
1 classification, applications, economic/environmental/societal benefits and 9
impact, industry trends, opportunities and challenges, CAD design for AM,
support structures.
Vat photopolymerization processes: Stereolithography (SLA), digital light
processing (DLP) and masked stereolithography (MSLA), material jetting
and binder jetting, applications.
2 9
Extrusion based AM Processes: Principles of melt extrusion and deposition,
fused filament fabrication (FFF), fused deposition modelling (FDM) and
direct ink writing (DIW), applications.
Direct energy deposition (DED) processes: Laser engineered net shaping
(LENS) and direct metal deposition (DMD), applications.

3 Powder bed fusion (PBF) processes: Direct metal laser sintering (DMLS), 9
selective laser sintering (SLS), electron beam melting (EBM), selective laser
melting (SLM) and multijet fusion (MJF), materials and applications.
Laminated object manufacturing (LOM): Ultrasonic consolidation (UC),
4 9
applications.
 AM defects: Lack of fusion, keyhole collapse, gas porosity, solidification
cracking, solid-state cracking, and surface-connected porosity.
Materials science for AM: Multifunctional and functionally graded materials
in AM.
Case studies of AM applications: Medical, aerospace, automotive, and
consumer products.

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

● 2 Questions from each ● Each question carries 9 marks.
module. ● Two questions will be given from each module, out
● Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
carrying 3 marks ● Each question can have a maximum of 3 60
subdivisions.
(8x3 =24 marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
CO1 Explain the concepts, processes and applications of AM technology. K2
Demonstrate vat polymerisation, extrusion and direct energy
CO2 K2
deposition techniques in AM.
Compare the key aspects of powder bed based and laser based AM
CO3 K2
techniques.
Explain LOM technique, material science of AM and various defects in
CO4 K3
AM; apply various processes of AM in industries.
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 - - - - 2 2 - - - - 2

CO2 3 - - - - 1 - - - - - 2

CO3 3 - - - - 1 - - - - - 2

CO4 3 - 2 - - 1 - - - - - 2

Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Ian Gibson, David W.
1 Additive Manufacturing 3rd Ed.,
Rosen,Brent Stucker, Springer
Technologies 2021
Mahyar Khorasani
Additive Manufacturing
2 1st Ed.,
:Principles,technologies and C.P Paul ,A N Jinoop McGrawHill
2021
Applications
3 Additive Manufacturing 1st Ed.,
S Shiva, Anuj K Shukla Wiley
Technologies 2024
 Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Additive Manufacturing and G K Awari, C S Thorat,
1st Ed.,
1 3D Printing Technology: Vishwajeet Ambade, D P CRC Press
2021
Principles and Applications Kothari
3D Printing and Additive
Chee Kai Chua, Kah Fai 5th Ed.,
2 Manufacturing : Principles and World Scientific
Leong 2017
Applications
M. Manjaiah K,
Additive Manufacturing: A
Raghavendra N, 1st Ed.,
3 Tool for Industrial Revolution Elsevier
Balashanmugam, J Paulo 2021
4.0
Davim
Additive Manufacturing
1st Ed.,
4 Technology: Design, Kun Zhou Wiley -VCH
2022
Optimization and Modelling
Additive Manufacturing
Adedeji B Badiru,
Handbook: Product 1st Ed.,
5 Vhance V Valencia, CREC press
Development for the defence 2017
David Liu
Industry

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/112/103/112103306/
Link ID
https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/112/104/112104312/
 SEMESTER: S6

INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION AND ROBOTICS LAB

Course Code PCPEL607 CIE Marks 50

Teaching Hours/Week
0:0:3:0 ESE Marks 50
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 2 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) None Course Type Lab

Course Objectives:

1. To provide students with hands-on experience in industrial automation.

2. To train students in robot programming for industrial production.

Expt.
No.
Experiments (Minimum 10 Experiments should be completed)
1 Pneumatic circuit simulation with single acting double acting cylinders.
2 Sequencing of multiple cylinder actuation in different combinations - pneumatic.
3 Sequencing of multiple cylinder actuation in different combinations - electro-pneumatic.
4 Automatic inspection systems using machine vision.
5 Sensor based process monitoring and control.
6 PLC Programming for process automation.
7 Pick and place robot operation using a 6 axis arm.
8 Coordinated motion of multiple actuator, electro - pneumatic systems in a desired
sequence using hard - wire programmed control systems.
9 Coordinated motion of multiple actuator, electro - pneumatic systems in a desired
sequence using PLC.
10 Interfacing of an LVDT with a PC for monitoring the displacement of machine slides and
raising an alarm if the displacement exceeds specified limit.
11 Control of speed, direction and number of revolutions of a stepper motor using a PC.
12 Determination of maximum and minimum position of links. Estimation of accuracy,
repeatability and resolution.
13 Verification of transformation (Position and orientation) with respect to gripper and world
coordinate system.
14 Robot programming and simulation for Colour identification.
15 Open and closed loop control of AC and DC drives.
16 Characterize the temperature sensor (RTD) and LVDT.
17 Simulation of Mathematical Model of Robot.
18 Forward and Inverse Dynamic Analysis of a 2-DOF Robotic Manipulator using Software
Tools.
 19 Building and Programming a Simple Arduino-Based Robot for basic movement.
20 Write a simple program to control a robot's motion (e.g., moving forward, backward,
turning) using programming commands.
21 Development of an obstacle avoidance robot using servo motors, ultrasonic and touch
sensors.
22 Design of conveyor automation system using PLC, SCADA and Electrical drive.

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 50 marks, ESE: 50 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Preparation/Pre-Lab Work experiments,

Viva and Timely Internal
Attendance Total
completion of Lab Reports / Record Examination
(Continuous Assessment)

5 25 20 50

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE):

Procedure/ Conduct of experiment/ Result with valid

Preparatory Execution of work/ inference/ Viva
Record Total
work/Design/ troubleshooting/ Quality of voce
Algorithm Programming Output
10 15 10 10 5 50

● Submission of Record: Students shall be allowed for the end semester examination only upon
submitting the duly certified record.

● Endorsement by External Examiner: The external examiner shall endorse the record

Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
CO1 Model and simulation of automated systems using pneumatics. K3
CO2 Model and simulation of automated systems using electro-pneumatics. K3
CO3 Develop Program for robots in industrial application. K3
CO4 Develop automated industrial systems using sensors and image capture. K3
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create
 CO- PO Mapping (Mapping of Course Outcomes with Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 - 2 - 3 2 - - 2 2 - 3

CO2 3 - 2 - 3 2 - - 2 2 - 3

CO3 3 - 2 - 2 2 - - 2 2 - 3

CO4 3 - 3 - 2 2 - - 2 2 - 3
1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Name of the Edition and
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher Year
1 Fundamentals of pneumatic J P Hasebrink and R
Festo Didactic 3rd Ed., 2000
control engineering Kobler
2 Robot operating system vol
Anis Kouba Springer 2017
1&2

Reference Books
Name of the Edition and
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher Year
Sherlock Machine vision Teledyne Dalsa
1 Teledyne Dalsa 2017
software Industrial products
Dan Ginsburg),
Budirijanto Purnomo ,
2 Open GL 3 programming guide Addison-Wesley 2nd Ed., 2014
Dave Shreiner & Aaftab
Munshi

Continuous Assessment (25 Marks)

1. Preparation and Pre-Lab Work (7 Marks)

● Pre-Lab Assignments: Assessment of pre-lab assignments or quizzes that test understanding

of the upcoming experiment.
● Understanding of Theory: Evaluation based on students’ preparation and understanding of the
theoretical background related to the experiments.
2. Conduct of Experiments (7 Marks)

● Procedure and Execution: Adherence to correct procedures, accurate execution of

experiments, and following safety protocols.
● Skill Proficiency: Proficiency in handling equipment, accuracy in observations, and
troubleshooting skills during the experiments.
● Teamwork: Collaboration and participation in group experiments.
 3. Lab Reports and Record Keeping (6 Marks)

● Quality of Reports: Clarity, completeness and accuracy of lab reports. Proper documentation
of experiments, data analysis and conclusions.
● Timely Submission: Adhering to deadlines for submitting lab reports/rough record and
maintaining a well-organized fair record.

4. Viva Voce (5 Marks)

● Oral Examination: Ability to explain the experiment, results and underlying principles
during a viva voce session.

Final Marks Averaging: The final marks for preparation, conduct of experiments, viva,
and record are the average of all the specified experiments in the syllabus.

Evaluation Pattern for End Semester Examination (50 Marks)

1. Procedure/Preliminary Work/Design/Algorithm (10 Marks)

● Procedure Understanding and Description: Clarity in explaining the procedure and

understanding each step involved.
● Preliminary Work and Planning: Thoroughness in planning and organizing
materials/equipment.
● Algorithm Development: Correctness and efficiency of the algorithm related to the
experiment.
● Creativity and logic in algorithm or experimental design.

2. Conduct of Experiment/Execution of Work/Programming (15 Marks)

● Setup and Execution: Proper setup and accurate execution of the experiment or programming
task.

3. Result with Valid Inference/Quality of Output (10 Marks)

● Accuracy of Results: Precision and correctness of the obtained results.

● Analysis and Interpretation: Validity of inferences drawn from the experiment or quality of
program output.

4. Viva Voce (10 Marks)

● Ability to explain the experiment, procedure results and answer related questions
● Proficiency in answering questions related to theoretical and practical aspects of the subject.

5. Record (5 Marks)

● Completeness, clarity, and accuracy of the lab record submitted

SEMESTER 7
PRODUCTION ENGINEERING
 SEMESTER: S7

ADVANCED WELDING AND METAL JOINING TECHNIQUES

Course Code PEPET741 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) None Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. To familiarise the principles and applications of advanced welding and metal joining
techniques.
2. To equip students with the latest developments and innovations in welding and metal joining.
SYLLABUS
Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Overview of metal joining process: Importance of advanced joining
techniques, applications in industries.
Solid state welding: Friction welding, friction stir welding, inertia welding-
working principle and applications. Explosive welding, diffusion bonding,
1 high frequency induction welding-working principles, process parameters 9
and applications.
Plasma arc welding:Theory and principles, transferred and non - transferred
arc techniques, equipment and tooling, electroslag welding, electroslag
welding.
Radiant energy welding: Electron beam welding, background of the process
and welding equipment, laser beam welding, physics of lasers, types of

2 lasers, process parameters, applications and limitations, hybrid laser - arc 9

welding. ultrasonic welding - principles of operations, process characteristics
and applications.
Inert gas arc welding: Gas metal arc welding (GMAW), Gas tungsten arc
welding (GTAW) - equipment used, working principles. heat affected zone

3 and its characteristics, 9

Metallurgy of welding: Weldability of steels, cast iron, stainless steel, Mg,
Cu, zirconium and titanium alloys, underwater welding process - equipment
 used, applications.
Adhesive joining: Types of adhesives, joining of dissimilar materials,
applications.
Magnetic pulse welding: High speed welding using magnetic pulse.
microwave welding - high speed welding using microwave energy.
Modern soldering and brazing technique: Induction, dip resistance, diffusion
process - hot gas wave and vapour phase soldering.
4 9
Automated welding using robots: Overview of automation of welding,
welding applications in aerospace, nuclear, surface transport vehicles.
Joining of advanced materials: Joining of composites, joining of smart
materials, joining of nanomaterials.

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written)

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

● 2 Questions from each ● Each question carries 9 marks.
module. ● Two questions will be given from each module, out
● Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
carrying 3 marks ● Each question can have a maximum of 3 60
subdivisions.
(8x3 = 24 marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcomes Knowledge
Level (KL)
Explain the principles and applications of various solid state welding
CO1 K2
processes, electroslag and electro gas welding.

CO2 Demonstrate the principles and process of Radiant Energy welding. K2

Apply the weldability of materials at different contexts of industrial
CO3 applications, and explain the inert gas arc welding welding and K3
adhesive joining of dissimilar materials.
Demonstrate the magnetic pulse welding process and modern
CO4 K3
soldering; utilise automated welding processes for various applications.
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 - - - 2 2 - - - - - 2

CO2 3 - - - 2 2 - - - - - 2

CO3 3 - 2 - 2 2 - - - - - 2

CO4 3 - 2 - 2 2 - - - - - 2
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Name of the Edition and
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher Year
1 Modern Welding Technology Howard B Cary, Pearson/Scott
6th Ed., 2005
Scott C Helzer C. Helzer
2 Welding Engineering and Dr. R S Parmar Khanna Publishers 3rd Ed.. 2013
Technology
3. Advanced Welding Process J N DuPOnt and J M CRC Press. 2nd Ed.,
Sanders 2019
Welding Metallurgy and
4. John C Lippold John Wiley & Sons 4th Ed., 2015
Weldability
 Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
6th Ed.,
1 Welding Brazing & Soldering ASM Handbook ASM Handbook
2010
A Textbook of Welding Dhanpat Rai 1st Ed.,
2 O P Khanna
Technology Publications 2005
Tata McGraw-Hill 4th Ed.,
3 Welding Engineering. N K Sreenivasan
Education. 2004
“Welding: Principles and 8th Ed.,
4 Larry Jeffus Cengage Learning
Applications” 2019
“Automation and Robotics in 1st Ed.,
5 S J Mistry Taylor & Francis
Welding” 2017
“Welding Automation in 1st Ed.,
6 S Kumar CRC Press
Aerospace Industry” 2020

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/112/107/112107213/
Link ID
https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/112/103/112103305/
 SEMESTER: S7

SIX SIGMA

Course Code PEPET742 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) None Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. To familiarise the tools and techniques of six sigma quality philosophy.

2. To apply DMAIC methodology for quality improvement.

SYLLABUS
Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Quality fundamentals and key concepts: Quality concepts and definition,
history of continuous improvement, six sigma principles and focus areas,
DMAIC methodology, six sigma applications.
1 9
Quality management: Basics and key concepts, fundamentals of total
quality management, cost of quality, voice of customer, quality function
deployment (QFD), management and planning tools.
Define phase: Six sigma project identification, selection and definition,
project charter and monitoring, process characteristics and analysis, process
mapping SIPOC.
2 Measure phase: Data collection and summarization, measurement systems 9
fundamentals, measurement systems analysis, Gage R&R study,
fundamentals of statistics, probability theory, process capability analysis,
measures and indices, non-normal process capability analysis.
Analyze phase: Hypothesis testing fundamentals, hypothesis testing single
population test, hypothesis testing two population test, correlation and
3 regression analysis, one-way ANOVA, two-way ANOVA, failure mode and 9
effect analysis (FMEA).
Improve phase: Introduction to design of experiment, randomized block
 design, randomized block design, factorial design, Taguchi method - key
concepts and illustrative applications.
Control phase: Seven QC tools, statistical process control, control charts
for variables, control charts for attributes.
4 9
Six sigma implementation challenges: Design for six sigma (DFSS)
DMADV, DMADOV, DFX, team management, case studies.

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

● 2 Questions from each ● Each question carries 9 marks.
module. ● Two questions will be given from each module, out
● Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
carrying 3 marks ● Each question can have a maximum of 3 60
subdivisions.
(8x3 =24 marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
CO1 Explain the fundamental concepts of quality and quality management. K2
CO2 Identify and summarise the define and measure phases of Six Sigma. K3
CO3 Select appropriate tools to analyse and improve processes. K3
Select the suitable tools to control processes and identify the K3
CO4
implementation challenges of Six Sigma.
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 2 - 2 - - - - - - - - 2

CO2 3 - 3 - 2 2 - - - - - 2

CO3 3 - 3 - 2 2 - - - - - 2

CO4 3 - 3 - 2 2 - - - - - 2
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
The Six Sigma Handbook: A
5th Ed.,
1 Complete Guide for Green Thomas Pyzdek and Paul McGraw-Hill
2023
Belts, Black Belts and Keller Education
Managers at All Levels
Roderick A. Munro and ASQ Quality Press
2 The certified six sigma Green 2nd Ed.,
Govindarajan Ramu and and Infotech Standards
Belt Handbook 2017
Daniel J Zrymiak India Pvt Ltd
 Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
1 The Certified Six Sigma Black T. M. Kubiak and 3rd Ed.,
Pearson Publication.
Belt Handbook Donald W Benbow 2018
2 John Wiley & Sons 2nd Ed.,
Implementing Six Sigma Forrest W Breyfogle III
INC 2003
3 An Introduction to Six Sigma Evans J R and W M 2nd Ed.,
CENGAGE Learning
and Process Improvement Lindsay 2015
4 Six Sigma for Green Belts and Howard S. Gitlow and 1st Ed.,
Pearson Education Inc
Champions David M Levine 2004
5 Design and Analysis of 10th Ed.,
Montgomery D C Wiley
Experiments 2019
6 Fundamentals of Quality 4th Ed.,
Mitra Amitava Wiley India Pvt Ltd
Control and Improvement 2016
7 Statistical Quality Control A 7th Ed.,
Montgomery D C Wiley
Modern Introduction 2012
Lean Six Sigma and Minitab: 7th Ed.,
8 The Complete Toolbox Guide OPEX Resources 2022
Quentin Brook
for All Lean Six Sigma
Practitioners

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/110/105/110105123/
Link ID
https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/110/105/110105039/
 SEMESTER: S7

DESIGN OPTIMIZATION

Course Code PEPET743 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) None Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. To familiarise the standard methods of mathematical modeling techniques in design.

2. To enable students to apply advanced modeling techniques in practical scenarios.
SYLLABUS
Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Introduction to design: System design, morphology of design, concept of
workable design, practical example on workable system and optimal design.
1 Newton Raphson method, one unknown - examples, multiple unknowns - 9
examples. Gauss Seidel method - examples, rudiments of finite difference
method for partial differential equations with example.
Regression and curve fitting: Need for regression in simulation and
optimization, concept of best fit and exact fit. Exact fit - Lagrange
2 interpolation, Newton's divided difference - examples. Least square 9
regression - theory, Gauss Newton method for nonlinear least squares
regression - examples.
Optimization and algorithms: Method of steepest ascent/steepest descent,
conjugate gradient method, power law forms, geometric programming.
3 9
Optimization algorithms, complex R-F, genetic algorithms, multi objective
optimization, priori methods, posteriori methods.
Advanced optimization: Interactive methods, interpreting the Pareto front,
multidisciplinary optimization, multidisciplinary feasible MDF, bi-level
4 integrated system synthesis (BLISS), surrogate models, types - polynomial 9
response surfaces, kriging, neural networks, radial basis functions - case
studies.
 Course Assessment Method
(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written)

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

● 2 Questions from each ● Each question carries 9 marks.
module. ● Two questions will be given from each module, out
● Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
carrying 3 marks ● Each question can have a maximum of 3 60
subdivisions.
(8x3 = 24 marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)

Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcomes Knowledge
Level (KL)
Explain the system concept in design and apply numerical techniques in
CO1 K3
system design.
Develop relationships between different design variables using
CO2 K3
correlation and curve fitting.
Solve multi objective design problems using optimization methods and
CO3 K3
algorithms.
Solve multidisciplinary design optimization problems for various
CO4 K3
industrial applications
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create
 CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 3 3 - - - - - - - - 2

CO2 3 3 2 - - - - - - - - 2

CO3 3 3 2 - - - - - - - - 2

CO4 3 3 3 - 3 - - - - - - 2
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
1 Essentials of Thermal System 1st Ed.,
C Balaji CRC Press
Design and Optimization 2018
2 System design optimization for Springer-Verlag 1st Ed.,
Masataka Yoshimura
product manufacturing London Limited 2010

Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
4th Ed.,
1 Introduction to optimum design J S Arora McGraw Hill
2017
Optimization for engineering
2nd Ed.,
2 design - algorithms and K Deb Prentice Hall
2012
examples
Design and optimization of 2nd Ed.,
3 Y Jaluria CRC Press
thermal systems 2007
Elements of thermal fluid
4 L C Burmeister Pearson 1st Ed., 1998
system design
3rd Ed.,
5 Design of thermal systems W F Stoecker McGraw Hill
2011

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/111/107/111107105/
Link ID
https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/106/108/106108056/
 SEMESTER: S7

ERGONOMICS

Course Code PEPET744 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) None Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. To familiarise the concepts of ergonomics, work induced stress and fatigue.

2. To enable the students to apply the concepts of work environment and workplace design in
industries.
SYLLABUS
Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Ergonomics: Introduction, understanding of ergo-system, fitting task to man
their contractual structure, humanise work, basic body mechanics, anatomy
of spine and pelvis for postures, stability and postural adaptation,
1 9
musculoskeletal disorders in work spaces, behavioural aspects of postures,
sources of human variability, principles of applied anthropometry,
application of anthropometry in design, design for everyone, personal space.
Work induced stress and fatigue: Design of standing and sitting, workstation
design, work surface design, visual display units, guidelines for design of
static and repetitive works, ergonomic interventions - handle design,

2 keyboard design. Anatomy and biomechanics of manual handling, 9

prevention of injuries in manual handling, design of manual handling task,
carrying, muscle structure - function and capacity, factors affecting physical
work capacity.
Work environment and their interactions: Eye Vision, measurement of light,
lighting design consideration, design of visual displays, visual fatigue, eye
strain and near work, indoor lighting, psychological aspects. Measurement of
3 9
sound, ear protection, design of acoustic environment, industrial noise
control, design of visual displays, design of audio displays, design of
controls, combining displays and controls, virtual environment.
 Applied physiology in work space: Measurement of physiological cost of
work, indoor climate, protection against extreme climates. Human error and
equipment design, mental workload in human machine interaction,

4 characteristics of human machine interaction, prevention of human error, 9

human computer interaction, human centred design process for interactive
systems, human computer dialogue, system design methods for ergonomics,
cross cultural considerations.

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

● 2 Questions from each ● Each question carries 9 marks.
module. ● Two questions will be given from each module, out
● Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
carrying 3 marks ● Each question can have a maximum of 3 60
subdivisions.
(8x3 = 24 marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcomes Knowledge
Level (KL)
CO1 Interpret ergonomics and principles of anthropometry. K2
CO2 Explain work induced stress and fatigue. K2
Apply the work environment and their interactions in workplace
CO3 K3
design.
CO4 Demonstrate the work physiology and its application in work places. K2
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 - 2 - - 2 2 - - - - 2

CO2 3 - 2 - - 2 2 - - - - 2

3 - 2 - - 2 2 - - - - 2
CO3

CO4 3 - 2 - - 2 2 - - - - 2

Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Name of the Name of the Edition and
Sl. No Title of the Book
Author/s Publisher Year
1 Introduction to Ergonomics Bridger R S McGraw Hill 1st Ed., 1995

2 Human Factors in Engineering McCormick J McGraw Hill 1st Ed., 1992

and Design
 Reference Books
Name of the Edition and
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher Year
1 Human Factors in Product Design Green W S and Jordan P Taylor & Francis
1st Ed., 2019
W
2 A Guide to Human Factors and Martin Helander CRC Press 2nd Ed.2005
Ergonomics
Ergonomic Workplace Design for
3 Health, Wellness, and Alan Hedge CRC Press 1st Ed., 2016
Productivity

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

Link ID https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/112/104/112104222/
 SEMESTER: S7

ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND AUDIT

Course Code PEPET745 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 5/3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) None Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. To familiarise the principles and concepts of energy management and auditing.

2. To equip students to practice energy management and auditing.

SYLLABUS
Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Introduction to energy management: Overview of energy management and
auditing, energy scenario in various sectors, energy consumption in various
areas.
1 9
Energy policies and regulations: BEE schemes under energy conservation
act, electricity act 2003-I, electricity act 2003-II, integrated energy policy-I,
integrated energy policy-II.
Energy management and energy audit: Objectives, energy management

2 frameworks and standards, energy audit and its types, energy audit 9
procedures and checklist, energy performance and benchmarking.
Implementation of energy audit: Instruments involved in energy auditing,
introduction to monitoring and targeting, analysis of information and data
3 with management information system, planning of energy policy, evaluation 9
and implementation of energy performance, tools for effective
implementation.
Case studies in energy management and audit: Real life case studies of

4 energy auditing and management, developing an energy management plan, 9

energy saving measures and projects, environment impact assessment.
 Course Assessment Method
(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Attendance Internal Ex Evaluate Analyse Total

5 15 10 10 40

Criteria for Assessment (Analyse and Evaluate): 20 marks

Phases Assessment Criteria Marks

Problem Definition

. Clearly defines the real-world quality issue. 5

. Examine and identify relevant contextual factors.

Analyse Problem Analysis

. Present a structured realistic solution methodology. 5

. Compare and justify the proposed solutions with evidence and

logical reasoning

Validation of Results

. Thoroughly evaluate the proposed solutions.

5
. Compares trade-offs, advantages, and disadvantages.

. Considers feasibility, scalability, and practical implications.

Evaluate
Conclusion and Report Writing

. Summarizes procedure, findings and insights, limitation, and

5
scope for future work.

. Preparation of Report with all components of project report.

 End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

● 2 Questions from each ● Each question carries 9 marks.
module. ● Two questions will be given from each module, out
● Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
carrying 3 marks ● Each question can have a maximum of 3 60
subdivisions.
(8x3 =24 marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)

Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
CO1 Explain the basics of energy management and its policies. K2
CO2 Demonstrate energy audit and energy performance benchmarking. K2
CO3 Develop skills in analysing energy data and making recommendations. K3
CO4 Analyse energy audit in real life situations. K4
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 - - - 2 - - - - - - 2

CO2 3 - - - 2 - - - - - - 2

CO3 3 - 2 - 2 - - - - - - 2

CO4 3 - 3 - 2 - 3 - - - - 2
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation
 Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Agarkar Santosh
1 Fundamentals of Energy Lambert Academic 1st Ed.,
Vyankatro and Mateti
Conservation and Audit publishing 2015
Naresh Kumar
1st Ed.,
2 Energy Management, Audit and Barun Kumar De
Vrinda publication 2007
Conservation
1st Ed.,
3 Energy Management and K V Sharma and P I K International
2007
Conservation Venkata Seshaiah Publishing House

Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Albert Thumann and 9th Ed.,
1 Handbook of Energy Audits CRC press
Terry Niehus. 2013
Barney L. Capehart,
8th Ed.,
2 Guide to Energy Management Wayne C. Turner, and CRC press
2020
William J. Kennedy.

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

https://onlinecourses.swayam2.ac.in/nou23_es05
Link ID
https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/124/107/124107160/
 SEMESTER: S7

ADVANCED MATERIALS AND PROCESSES

Course Code PEPET751 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) None Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. To familiarise the characteristics of structural and functional materials

2. To utilize the advanced techniques used in selecting materials for manufacturing
SYLLABUS
Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Structural and functional materials: Introduction and classification of energy
materials and smart materials, evolution of engineering materials, metastable
alloys.
1 High temperature Materials: Structure, processing, mechanical behaviour 9
and oxidation resistance of stainless steels, Ni- and Co- based superalloys,
aluminides and silicides, carbon-carbon and ceramic composites,
biomaterials.
Shape-Memory Alloys: Mechanisms of one-way and two-way shape
memory effect, reverse transformation, thermoelasticity and pseudo-
2 elasticity, examples and applications. 9
Bulk Metallic Glass: Criteria for glass formation and stability, examples and
mechanical behaviour.
Nano-materials: Classification, size effect on structural and functional
properties, processing and properties of nano-crystalline materials, thin films

3 and multilayered coatings. 9

Single walled and multiwalled carbon nanotubes: Methods of synthesis of
nanomaterials, applications.
Soft and hard magnetic materials for storage devices: Design and processing,
4 9
piezoelectric materials - processing and properties.
 Advanced processes applied for advanced materials: Single crystal growth,
rapid solidification, inert gas condensation, physical and chemical vapour
deposition of thin films.

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

● 2 Questions from each ● Each question carries 9 marks.
module. ● Two questions will be given from each module, out
● Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
carrying 3 marks ● Each question can have a maximum of 3 60
subdivisions.
(8x3 = 24 marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcomes Knowledge
Level (KL)
Explain structural and functional materials for various industrial
CO1 K2
applications.
Demonstrate the characteristics and applications of shape-memory
CO2 K2
alloys and bulk metallic glass.

CO3 Explain nano-materials and applications K2

CO4 Illustrate advanced processes applied for advanced materials K2
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 2 2 - - 2 2 - - - - 2

CO2 3 2 2 - - 2 2 - - - - 2

CO3 3 2 2 - - 2 2 - - - - 2

CO4 3 2 2 - - 2 2 - - - - 2
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Addison Wesley
1 Manufacturing Engineering and Serope Kalpakjian and 5th Ed.,
Longman (Singapore)
Technology Steven R Schmid 2000
Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi
2 Nanoengineering of structural, 1st Ed.,
Mark J. Schulz Taylor & Francis
functional and smart materials 2006
 Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Nanocomposite science and 1st Ed.,
1 Pulikel M. Ajayan Wiley-VCH
technology 2005
Analysis and Performance of B. D. Agarwal, L. J. 4th Ed.,
2 John Wiley
Fiber Composites Broutman 2017

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

Link ID https://archive.nptel.ac.in/noc/courses/noc18/SEM2/noc18-mm12/
 SEMESTER: S7

ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING TECHNOLOGIES

Course Code PEPET752 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) None Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. To familiarise various aspects of additive manufacturing such as choice of materials,

technology and process capability of each process.
2. To enable students to apply the design and applications in additive manufacturing.

SYLLABUS
Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Introduction: Need for additive manufacturing (AM), evolution of AM
technologies, steps in AM, types, AM processes, ASTM standard process
classification, applications of AM in medical, aerospace, automotive, and
1 consumer products, benefits and societal impacts, industry trends, 9
opportunities and challenges.
AM design process: CAD design for AM, STL File generation, staircase
effect, support structure design and removal, anisotropy of print parts.
Vat photopolymerisation techniques: Stereolithography (SLA), digital light
processing (DLP) and masked stereolithography (MSLA). Resin materials -
properties, types and applications, material jetting and binder jetting, process
capabilities and applications.
2 9
Extrusion based AM processes: Principles of melt extrusion and deposition,
techniques - fused filament fabrication (FFF), fused deposition modelling
(FDM) and direct ink writing (DIW), material properties, process capability,
applications.
Powder bed fusion based AM processes: Direct metal laser sintering
3 (DMLS), selective laser sintering (SLS), electron beam melting (EBM), 9
selective laser melting (SLM) and multijet fusion (MJF), process
 phenomena, powder handling, process capabilities, comparison, materials.
SLM process: Laser material interaction, effect of laser parameters, melting
modes - conduction and keyhole mode of operation, marangoni effect.
Laminated object manufacturing (LOM): Ultrasonic consolidation (UC)
process capability, applications.
Direct energy deposition (DED) based AM Processes: Laser engineered net
shaping (LENS), direct metal deposition (DMD), process capabilities and
applications.
AM defects: Prediction and mitigation, post-processing techniques.
4 9
Materials science for AM: Multifunctional and functionally graded materials
in AM process, structure, property correlation.
Design for additive manufacturing (DfAM): DfAM guidelines, design of
lightweight and porous structures.

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

● 2 Questions from each ● Each question carries 9 marks.
module. ● Two questions will be given from each module, out
● Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
carrying 3 marks ● Each question can have a maximum of 3 60
subdivisions.
(8x3 =24 marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
Explain AM technology and its processes, design and printing of AM
CO1 K2
components.

CO2 Demonstrate vat and extrusion based deposition techniques in AM. K2

Interpret the key differences of powder bed and DED based AM
CO3 K2
processes; explain SLM process and LOM.

CO4 Apply DfAM concepts in lightweight designs. K3

Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 - - - - 1 2 - - - - 2

CO2 3 - - - - 1 - - - - - 2

CO3 3 - 2 - - 1 - - - - - 2

CO4 3 - 2 - - 1 - - - - - 2
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Ian Gibson, David W.
1 Additive Manufacturing 3rd Ed.,
Rosen,Brent Stucker, Springer
Technologies 2021
Mahyar Khorasani
Additive Manufacturing
2 McGrawHill 1st Ed.,
:Principles,technologies and C.P Paul ,A N Jinoop
2021
Applications
3 Additive Manufacturing Wiley 1st Ed.,
S Shiva ,Anuj K Shukla
Technologies 2024
 Reference Books
Name of the Edition and
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher Year
Additive Manufacturing and 3D G K Awari, C S Thorat,
1st Ed.,
1 Printing Technology: Principles Vishwajeet Ambade, D P CRC Press
2021
and Applications Kothari
3D Printing and Additive
Chee Kai Chua, Kah Fai 5th Ed.,
2 Manufacturing : Principles and World Scientific
Leong 2017
Applications
Rapid Prototyping: Laser-based Patri K Venuvinod ,
3 Springer Verlag 1st Ed., 1998
and Other Technologies Weiyin Ma
M. Manjaiah K,
Additive Manufacturing: A
Raghavendra N, 1st Ed.,
4 Tool for Industrial Revolution Elsevier
Balashanmugam, J Paulo 2021
4.0
Davim
Rapid Prototyping: Principles
1st Ed.,
5 and Applications in Rafiq Noorani Wiley
2006
Manufacturing
Additive Manufacturing
1st Ed.,
6 Technology: Design, Kun Zhou Wiley -VCH
2022
Optimization and Modelling
Additive Manufacturing
Adedeji B Badiru,
Handbook: Product 1st Ed.,
7 Vhance V Valencia, CREC press
Development for the defence 2017
David Liu
Industry
Additive Manufacturing of
Metals : From Fundamental
1st Ed.,
8 technology to Rocket John O Milewski Springer
2017
Nozzles,Medical Implants and
custom jewellery

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/112/103/112103306/
Link ID
https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/112/104/112104312/
 SEMESTER: S7

PRODUCT AND BRAND MANAGEMENT

Course Code PEPET753 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

None
Prerequisites (if any) Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. To familiarize the concepts and principles of product and brand management.

2. To equip students to apply the concepts of product life cycle, product demand estimation,
product development and launching.
SYLLABUS
Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Product management: Introduction, terminologies associated with product,
product planning, product classification, product differentiation and its
1 9
elements. product category analysis, insight, innovation and design thinking.
New product development: Factors affecting the success and failure of new
product development.
Product life cycle: concept, strategies related to different stages of PLC.
Market and product planning: Product strategy and decisions, product
2 pricing, product packaging, meaning, importance, types, features, factors 9
influencing packing decision, green packing - concept and importance,
product distribution and promotion strategies.
Brand Management: Meaning, functions and significance-types of brands,
concept of branding. Branding strategies, branding challenges and
3 9
opportunities, brand equity concept, customer based brand equity, brand
switching.
Measuring and interpreting brand performance: Developing a brand equity
measurement and management system, the brand value chain, designing
brand tracking studies.
Brand architecture strategies: Brand portfolio, brand hierarchy, brand
4 extensions, co-branding, corporate branding, brand management tools, brand 9
communication-need and advantages of brand communication. Brand loyalty
and equity-factors affecting brand loyalty, brand equity, brand extension.
 Course Assessment Method
(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written)

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

● 2 Questions from each ● Each question carries 9 marks.
module. ● Two questions will be given from each module, out
● Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
carrying 3 marks ● Each question can have a maximum of 3 60
subdivisions.
(8x3 = 24 marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)

Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcomes Knowledge
Level (KL)
CO1 Develop effective product strategies, plans and Analyse market trends K3
and customer needs across the PLC
CO2 Apply the concepts of packing materials, sustainability and K3
environmental impacts.
Apply the brand management concepts for developing brand
CO3 K3
strategies.
Develop brand architecture strategies for different marketing
CO4 K3
environments.
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create
 CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 - 2 - - - - - - - - 2

CO2 3 - 2 - - - 2 - - - - 2

CO3 3 - 2 - - - - - - - - 2

CO4 3 - 2 - - - - - - - - 2
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
The new strategic Brand 4th Ed.,
1 Management: Creating and J.N Kapferer Kogan Page 2004
sustaining Brand Equity.
5th Ed.,
2 Strategic Brand Management Kevin Lane Keller Pearson Education
2020
David A. Aaker, Robert 7th Ed.,
3. Product and brand Management Wiley
Jacobson. 2018

Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Oxford University 1st Ed., 2016
1 Product and brand management Tapan panda
Press
3rd Ed.,
2 Brand Management Harsh V Verma Excel
2013
Brand Management Principles Oxford University 2nd Ed.,
3 Kirti Dutta
and Practice Press 2015
2nd Ed.,
4 Product Management Don Seller, Meri Gruber Routledge
2020

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

Link ID https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/110/107/110107161/
https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/112/107/112107238/
 SEMESTER: S7

HEAT AND MASS TRANSFER

Course Code PEPET754 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) None Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. To impart the concept of various modes of heat and mass transfer.

2. To enable students to apply the modes of heat and mass transfer rates in conduction,
convection and radiation.

SYLLABUS
Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Modes of heat transfer: Conduction, convection and radiation, Fourier law,
Newton’s law, Stefan Boltzmann law, thermal resistance, analogy between
flow of heat and electricity, general differential equation, cartesian

1 coordinate, thermal diffusivity. 9

One dimensional steady state heat conduction: Plane and composite systems
(plane wall, cylinder and sphere), importance of critical thickness,
conduction with internal heat generation, extended surfaces.
Convection: Free and forced convection, boundary layer concepts, forced
convection, external flow-flow over plates, cylinders, sphere, bank of tubes,
2 9
internal flow, free convection-flow over vertical plate, horizontal plate,
inclined plate, cylinder and sphere.
Radiation: Radiation laws and radiate properties, black body and gray body
radiation, radiosity, view factor relations, electrical analogy. radiation
3 9
shields.
Boiling and condensation: Film wise and drop wise condensation.
Mass transfer: Diffusion mass transfer, Fick’s law of diffusion, equimolar
4 diffusion, diffusion coefficient, convective mass transfer, analogy with heat 9
transfer, convective mass transfer correlations.
 Course Assessment Method
(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

● 2 Questions from each ● Each question carries 9 marks.
module. ● Two questions will be given from each module, out
● Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
carrying 3 marks ● Each question can have a maximum of 3 60
subdivisions.
(8x3 = 24 marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)

Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
CO1 Explain the basic principles of heat transfer and apply convection K3
mode of heat transfer.
CO2 Make use of the concepts in convection mode of heat transfer for K3
solving industrial problems.
CO3 Apply radiation mode of heat transfer to solve industrial problems. K3
CO4 Make use of the concepts in mass transfer to solve practical problems. K3

Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create
 CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 3 - - - 2 - - - - - 2

CO2 3 3 - - - 2 - - - - - 2

CO3 3 3 - - - 2 - - - - - 2

CO4 3 3 - - - 2 - - - - - 2
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Revised
1 A text book of heat and mass
R. K Rajput S Chand edition
transfer
2018
2 Fundamentals of heat and mass 4th Ed.,
R C Sachdeva New age science
transfer 2009
3 5th Ed.,
Heat and mass transfer Yunus A Cenegal McGraw Hill
2017
4 Heat and mass transfer data 10th Ed.,
C P Kothadaraman New age international
book 2022

Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl.No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
10th Ed.,
1 Heat Transfer J P Holman McGraw Hill
2017
Reprint
2 Heat and mass transfer D S Kumar S K Kataria & Sons
2013
1st Ed.,
3 Principles of mass transfer K Sharma Prentice hall India
2007

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

Link ID https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/103/105/103105140/
https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/112/101/112101097/
 SEMESTER: S7

DESIGN FOR MANUFACTURING AND ASSEMBLY

Course Code PEPET755 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 5/3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) None Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. To familiarize with various product manufacturing design techniques.

2. To equip students with the basics of assembly techniques.

SYLLABUS
Contact
Module No. Syllabus Description
Hours
Introduction to DFMA: History of DFMA, steps for applying DFMA
during product design, advantages of applying DFMA during product
design, reasons for not implementing DFMA. 9
1
Materials and manufacturing: Introduction to materials and material
selection, classification of engineering materials, material selection for
product design.
Design for casting: Sand casting - typical characteristics of a sand cast
part, design recommendation for sand casting. Investment casting -
design consideration of investment casting, typical characteristics and
applications. Die casting - applications, suitable material consideration for
9
2 die casting, general design consideration, specific design
recommendation.
Injection moulding - introduction to injection moulding, typical
characteristics of injection moulded parts, effect of shrinkage, suitable
materials, design recommendations.
Design for machining: Introduction to machining, recommended materials
for machinability, design recommendations, design for tuning operation - 9
3
process description, typical characteristics and applications, suitable
materials, design recommendations. Machining round holes - introduction,
 suitable materials, design recommendations, recommended tolerances,
parts produced by milling- process description, characteristics and
applications of parts produced on milling machines, design
recommendations for milling.
Design for joining processes : Welding - design for recommendation for
welding process. Solder and braze assembly - process, typical
characteristics, suitable materials, detailed design recommendations.
Introduction to Assembly: The assembly process, characteristics and
9
4 applications, example of common assembly, economic significance of
assembly, general taxonomies of assembly operation and systems,
assembling a product.
Design for assembly: Introduction, Design consideration, design for
fasteners - introduction, design recommendation for fasteners.

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Attendance Internal Ex Evaluate Analyse Total

5 15 10 10 40

Criteria for Assessment (Analyse and Evaluate): 20 marks

Phases Assessment Criteria Marks

Problem Definition

. Clearly defines the real-world quality issue. 5

. Examine and identify relevant contextual factors.

Analyse Problem Analysis

. Present a structured realistic solution methodology. 5

. Compare and justify the proposed solutions with evidence and

logical reasoning
 Validation of Results

. Thoroughly evaluate the proposed solutions.

5
. Compares trade-offs, advantages, and disadvantages.

. Considers feasibility, scalability, and practical implications.

Evaluate
Conclusion and Report Writing

. Summarizes procedure, findings and insights, limitation, and

5
scope for future work.

. Preparation of Report with all components of project report.

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

● 2 Questions from each ● Each question carries 9 marks.
module. ● Two questions will be given from each module, out
● Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
carrying 3 marks ● Each question can have a maximum of 3 60
subdivisions.
(8x3 =24 marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)

Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
Explain the systematic design procedures with due consideration to the
CO1 K2
process and material constraints.
Develop geometrical shapes of components with due consideration to
CO2 K3
the constraints of various metal casting processes.
Select dimensional aspects of components with due consideration to
CO3 K3
the inherent process capabilities of various metal cutting processes.
Analyse product architecture and material combination for components
CO4 K4
enabling an easier assembly process.
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create
 CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 - - - - - - - - - - 2

CO2 3 - 3 - - - - - - - - 2

CO3 3 - 3 - - - - - - - - 2

CO4 3 - 3 - - - - - - - - 2

Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
1 Industrial Design, Materials John Willy and Sons, 2nd Ed.,
J Lesko
and Manufacture Guide Inc 2008
George E Dieter and McGraw-Hill
2 4th Ed.,
Engineering Design Linda C Schmidt Fourth companies, New York,
2017
edition USA
CRC press, Taylor &
Product Design for Geoffrey Boothroyd,
3 Francis, Florida, 3rd Ed.,
Manufacture and Assembly Peter Dewhurst and
USA 2010
Winston Knight

Reference Books
Sl. Name of the Name of the Edition and
Title of the Book
No Author/s Publisher Year
Design for Manufacturing and Chapman & Hall,
O Molloy, S Tilley and
1 assembly, London, UK. 1st Ed., 1998
E A Warman

Mechanical Assemblies: Their Oxford University

2 Design, Manufacture, and Role D E Whitney Press, New York 1st Ed., 2004
in Product Development

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/107/103/107103012/
Link ID
https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/112/101/112101005/
 SEMESTER: S7

SIX SIGMA

Course Code OEPET721 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) None Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. To familiarise the tools and techniques of six sigma quality philosophy.

2. To apply the DMAIC methodology for practical applications.

SYLLABUS
Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Quality fundamentals and quality management: Quality concepts and
definition, history of continuous improvement, six sigma principles and

1 focus areas, six sigma applications, design for six sigma (DFSS). Quality 9
management basics and key concepts, fundamentals of total quality
management, cost of quality.
Define: Six sigma project identification, selection and definition, project
charter and monitoring, process characteristics and analysis, process
mapping SIPOC.
2 Measure: Data collection and summarization, measurement systems 9
fundamentals, measurement systems analysis gauge R&R study,
fundamentals of statistics, probability theory, process capability analysis
key concepts, process capability analysis measures and indices.
Analyze: Hypothesis testing fundamentals, hypothesis testing- single
population test, two population test, correlation and regression analysis, one-
3 way ANOVA. 9
Improve: Introduction to design of experiment, randomized block design,
factorial design, voice of customer, quality function deployment (QFD).
Control: Seven QC tools, statistical process control key concepts, control
4 9
charts for variables and attributes, acceptance sampling key concepts,
 design of acceptance, sampling plans for attributes.
Six sigma methodologies: DMADV, DMADOV, DFX, roles and
responsibilities in six sigma, applications.

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

● 2 Questions from each ● Each question carries 9 marks.
module. ● Two questions will be given from each module, out
● Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
carrying 3 marks ● Each question can have a maximum of 3 60
subdivisions.
(8x3 =24 marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)

Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
CO1 Explain the basic concepts of quality and quality management. K2
CO2 Identify and summarise the define and measure phases of Six Sigma K3
CO3 Select appropriate tools to analyse and improve processes K3
Select the suitable tools to control processes and apply six sigma K3
CO4
methodologies.
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create
 CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 2 - 2 - - - - - - - - 2

CO2 3 - 3 - 2 2 - - - - - 2

CO3 3 - 3 - 2 2 - - - - - 2

CO4 3 - 3 - 2 2 - - - - - 2
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
The Six Sigma Handbook: A
5th Ed.,
1 Complete Guide for Green Thomas Pyzdek and Paul McGraw-Hill
2023
Belts, Black Belts and Keller Education
Managers at All Levels
Roderick A Munro and ASQ Quality Press
2 The certified six sigma Green 2nd Ed.,
Govindarajan Ramu and and Infotech Standards
Belt Handbook 2017
Daniel J Zrymiak India Pvt Ltd

Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
1 The Certified Six Sigma Black T M Kubiak and Donald 3rd Ed.,
Pearson Publication
Belt Handbook W Benbow 2018
2 John Wiley & Sons 2nd Ed.,
Implementing Six Sigma Forrest W Breyfogle III
INC 2003
3 An Introduction to Six Sigma Evans J R and W M 2nd
CENGAGE Learning
and Process Improvement Lindsay Ed.,2015
4 Six Sigma for Green Belts and Howard S. Gitlow and Financial Times/ 1st Ed.,
Champions David M Levine Prentice Hall 2004
5 Design and Analysis of 10th Ed.,
Montgomery D C Wiley
Experiments 2019
6 Fundamentals of Quality 4th Ed.,
Mitra Amitava Wiley India Pvt Ltd.
Control and Improvement 2016
7 Statistical Quality Control A 7th Ed.,
Montgomery D C Wiley
Modern Introduction 2012

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/110/105/110105123/
Link ID
https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/110/105/110105039/
 SEMESTER: S7

ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND AUDIT

Course Code OEPET722 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) None Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. To familiarise the fundamentals of energy management and auditing.

2. To enable students to practice energy management and auditing.

SYLLABUS
Module Contact
Syllabus description
No. Hours
Introduction to various types of energy: Energy scenario in various sectors,

1 energy consumption in various areas, energy security and its conservation, 9

energy and its various forms, basics of electricity, basics of thermal energy.
BEE schemes under energy conservation act: Electricity act 2003-I,
electricity act 2003-II, integrated energy policy-I, integrated energy policy-
2 9
II, objectives of energy management and energy audit, energy audit and its
types, energy performance and benchmarking.
Implementation of energy audit: Instruments involved in energy auditing,
introduction to monitoring and targeting, analysis of information and data
3 with management information system, planning of energy policy, evaluation 9
and implementation of energy performance, tools for effective
implementation.
Energy and environmental issues: Impact of global warming in climate
change, international agreements and panels on climate change, protocols

4 and unions to combat climate change, sustainable development, introduction 9

to renewable energy sources, fundamentals of solar, wind hydro power,
biomass, wave tidal, geothermal energy, fuel cell and energy from wastes.
 Course Assessment Method
(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

● 2 Questions from each ● Each question carries 9 marks.
module. ● Two questions will be given from each module, out
● Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
carrying 3 marks ● Each question can have a maximum of 3 60
subdivisions.
(8x3 =24 marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)

Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
CO1 Explain various types of energy and its conservation. K2
CO2 Demonstrate energy policies and performance benchmarking. K2
CO3 Develop skills in analysing energy data and making recommendations K3
CO4 Illustrate environmental impacts and sustainability of energy resources K2
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create
 CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 - - - 2 - - - - - - 2

CO2 3 - - - 2 - - - - - - 2

CO3 3 - 2 - 2 - - - - - - 2

CO4 3 - - - 2 - 3 - - - - 2
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Agarkar Santosh
1 Fundamentals of Energy Lambert Academic 1st Ed.,
Vyankatro and Mateti
Conservation and Audit publishing 2015
Naresh Kumar
1st Ed.,
2 Energy Management, Audit and Barun Kumar De
Vrinda publication 2007
Conservation
1st Ed.,
3 Energy Management and K V Sharma and P I K International
2007
Conservation Venkata Seshaiah Publishing House
2nd Ed.,
4 Energy Engineering and
Chakrabarti A PHI learning 2011
Management

Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Albert Thumann and 9th Ed.,
1 Handbook of Energy Audits CRC press
Terry Niehus. 2013
Barney L. Capehart,
8th Ed.,
2 Guide to Energy Management Wayne C. Turner, and CRC press
2020
William J. Kennedy.

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

https://onlinecourses.swayam2.ac.in/nou23_es05
Link ID
https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/124/107/124107160/
 SEMESTER: S7

BUSINESS TO BUSINESS MARKETING

Course Code OEPET 723 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) None Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. To familiarise students with concepts of the B2B market and marketing strategies.
2. To gain knowledge about product management, pricing strategies and B2B marketing
research.

SYLLABUS
Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Introduction to Business to Business (B2B) marketing: Business marketing,
classifying goods for the business market, market structure, environment and
characteristics of business marketing, strategic role of marketing, B2B vs
B2C (Business to consumer) marketing.
1 9
Organizational buying and buyer behaviour: Organizational buyers’ decision
process, stepwise model and a process flow model, organizational and
business markets, government as a customer, commercial and institutional
customers, buygrid framework.
B2B Marketing Strategy: Strategy making and strategy management process,
industrial product strategy, managing products for business markets-
managing services for business markets, segmentation, targeting and
positioning (STP).
2 9
Business marketing communications: B2B advertising, digital marketing,
trade shows, exhibitions and business meets.
Industrial market forecasting: Demand forecasting models, qualitative and
quantitative forecasting methods.
Product management: Role of product in the industrial market, new product
3 9
development, industrial product life cycle, technology innovation life cycle,
 product evaluation matrix, techniques for identifying new products, quality
function deployment (QFD), perceptual mapping, reverse engineering, fish
bone diagram, role of service and maintenance in industrial markets,
strategies for managing services in business markets.
Pricing: Pricing strategies, the pricing policy, price on the internet, financial
marketing, competitive bidding, commercial terms and conditions, buyer
seller relationship, types of relationships, transactional and collaborative
relationships, influencing industrial customers.
4 9
B2B marketing research: Challenges in B2B research, developing a
marketing information system, role of qualitative research techniques in B2B
research, business marketing channels, implementing and controlling
marketing plan.

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written)

5 15 10 10 40
End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

● 2 Questions from each ● Each question carries 9 marks.
module. ● Two questions will be given from each module, out
● Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
carrying 3 marks ● Each question can have a maximum of 3 60
subdivisions.
(8x3 =24 marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
Explain B2B marketing and Organizational buying and buyer
CO1 K2
behaviour.
Demonstrate B2B marketing strategies that align with business
CO2 K2
objectives and business market needs.
Make use of the role of product management within B2B organizations
CO3 K3
and its relationship with other departments.

CO4 Demonstrate the pricing strategies and B2B marketing research. K2

Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 - 1 - - - - - - - - 2

CO2 3 - 2 - - - - - - - - 2

CO3 3 - 2 - - - - - - - - 2

CO4 3 - 1 - - - - - - - 2 2
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Business Market Management James C. Anderson, Das
1 Pearson 3rd Ed.,
Understanding, Creating and Narayandas, James A. Narus
2010
Delivering Value and D.V.R. Seshadri

2 Business Marketing: Text and 3rd Ed.,

Krishna K Havaldar Mcgraw Hill
Cases 2014
Business to Business
3 Alan Zimmerman, Jim 4th Ed.,
Marketing Management: A Routledge
Blythe 2021
Global Perspective
 Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Innovative B2B Marketing
2nd Ed.,
1 New Models, Processes and Simon Hall Kogan Page
2022
Theory
Business-to-Business Ross Brennan, Louise E. 2nd Ed.,
2 SAGE Publications
Marketing Canning 2011

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

Link ID https://nptel.ac.in/courses/110107168
SEMESTER 8
PRODUCTION ENGINEERING
 SEMESTER: S8

DESIGN AND IMPLEMENTATION OF HUMAN COMPUTER

INTERFACES

Course Code PEPET861 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) None Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. To familiarise the principles and concepts of human-computer interfaces and its

implementation.
2. To equip the students to apply the concepts of human-computer interfaces and its
design in practical scenarios.

SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Introduction to human-computer interfaces: Interactive systems, introduction
to usability, engineering for usability, interactive system life cycle, usability

1 requirements, contextual inquiry, functional requirements, specification, 9

software requirements specifications (SRS), usability and non-functional
requirements to SRS.
Introduction to interface design: Shneiderman's golden rules, Norman's
principles, prototyping, prototype evaluation, case studies in prototype

2 evaluation. 9
Basics of system design: Data flow diagram (DFD), entity relationship
diagram (ERD), case studies.
Object oriented design and coding: Unified modelling language (UML),
coding basics, code testing basics, review-based code testing, case studies.

3 Execution based code testing: Test cases and test suits, black - box testing - 9
equivalence class partitioning and boundary value analysis approaches,
white-box testing - control flow graph, case studies.
 System Integration and usability analysis: System integration and testing -
bottom-up testing and top down testing approaches, stubs and drivers,stages

4 of testing- alpha testing, beta testing and acceptance testing,types of testing, 9

empirical usability evaluation, experiment design, empirical data analysis,
project management.

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Assignment/ Internal Examination-1 Internal Examination- 2

Attendance Total
Microproject (Written) (Written)

5 15 10 10 40
End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

● 2 Questions from each ● Each question carries 9 marks.
module. ● Two questions will be given from each module, out
● Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
carrying 3 marks ● Each question can have a maximum of 3 60
subdivisions.
(8x3 =24 marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)

Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
Explain the principles, theories, and models of human-computer
CO1 K2
interaction.
Make use of key principles of interface design, system design concepts
CO2 K3
in practical applications.
CO3 Apply the coding concepts and its implementation in practical cases. K3
Utilise the usability testing to evaluate interfaces, identifying usability
CO4 K3
issues and user preferences.
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create
 CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 - 2 - 3 2 - - - - - 2

CO2 3 - 3 - 3 2 - - - - - 2

CO3 3 - 3 - 3 2 - - - - - 2

CO4 3 - 3 - 3 2 - - - - 2 2
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Human-Computer
1 Samit Bhattacharya McGraw Hill 1st Ed.,
Interaction: User-Centric
Education 2019
Computing for Design
2 Software Engineering: A Bruce R Maxim & Roger McGraw Hill 8th Ed.,
Practitioner’s Approach S Pressman Education 2019
Designing the user interface: Ben Shneiderman, C
3 5th Ed.,
Strategies for effective human Plaisant, M Cohen, S Pearson
2014
computer interaction Jacobs

Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Interaction Design: Beyond Jennifer Preece, Helen 4th Ed.,
1 John Wiley & Sons
Human – Computer Interaction Sharp, Yvonne Rogers 2015
Human-Computer Interface 2nd Ed.,
2 A G Sutcliffe Springer
Design 1995
Essential guide to User
Interface design: An 2nd Ed.,
3 W O Galitz John Wiley & Sons
Introduction to GUI Design 2002
Principle and Techniques

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

Link ID https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/106/103/106103237/
 SEMESTER: S8

CORROSION / ENVIRONMENTAL DEGRADATION / SURFACE

ENGINEERING

Course Code PEPET862 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) None Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. To familiarise various modes of wear mechanisms, corrosion and the various surface
engineering techniques.
2. To impart knowledge on surface degradation and failure analysis.

SYLLABUS
Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Surface degradation mechanisms: Introduction, commercial perspective,
adhesive wear mechanism, abrasive wear mechanism, wear phenomena

1 defined by dimensionless parameters, surface deterioration, fracture surface 9

degradation, heat and radiation on surface degradation, role of fatigue and
fracture mechanisms in wear debris formation, friction and lubrication.
Erosive and cavitation wear: Fatigue, fretting, melting and diffusive wear
mechanisms, brittle fracture wear, wear of ceramics and polymers.
Corrosion: Electrochemical mechanism of corrosion, forms of corrosion,
2 9
corrosion prevention and control, material selection for corrosion
environments, corrosion inhibitors, corrosion testing and measurements,
characterisation techniques.
Non - destructive testing: Recycling and reuse of materials, digitization of
established curves and data driven approach.
3 9
Life cycle assessment: Principal component analysis (PCA), failure / fault
analysis, failure mode and effect analysis (FMEA), case studies.

4 Degradation mechanism and surface engineering: Synergistically combined 9

 degradation mechanism, fractography, environmental assisted surface
deterioration, surface engineering, mitigation methods, types of maintenance
and monitoring techniques, and terotechnology.
Surface treatments: Surface coating, plating and anodizing, fusion processes,
vapour phase processes, economic losses by corrosion degradation and its
quantification.

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

● 2 Questions from each ● Each question carries 9 marks.
module. ● Two questions will be given from each module, out
● Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
carrying 3 marks ● Each question can have a maximum of 3 60
subdivisions.
(8x3 = 24 marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcomes Knowledge
Level (KL)
CO1 Explain the various modes of surface degradation mechanisms. K2
CO2 Demonstrate the wear and corrosion mechanisms and its prevention. K2
CO3 Explain the non-destructive testing techniques and life cycle analysis. K2
CO4 Outline the surface degradation and mitigation methods. K2
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 - 2 - - 2 2 - - - - 2

CO2 3 - 2 - - 2 2 - - - - 2

CO3 3 - 2 - - 2 2 - - - - 2

CO4 3 - 2 - - 2 2 - - - - 2
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
1 Tribology, Friction and Wear I M Hutchings Edward Arnold 1st Ed.,
of Engineering Material 1992
2 Introduction to Tribology B C Majumdar S Chand 1st Ed.,
2010

Reference Books
Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s Name of the Publisher
and Year
1 Tribology Handbook Michael J Neale Butterworth-Heinemann 2nd Ed.,
1995
2 Maintenance Engineering Darrin J Wikoff, Keith McGraw-Hill 8th Ed.,
Handbook Mobley 2014
Corrosion & Corrosion 3rd Ed.,
3 Uhlig H H John Wiley Publishers
Control 1985
 Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)
Link ID https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/113/105/113105105/
 SEMESTER: S8

CONDITION MONITORING AND MAINTENANCE MANAGEMENT

Course Code PEPET863 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) None Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. To familiarize maintenance concepts predictive maintenance in industries.

2. To enable students to plan and implement condition based maintenance methods.

SYLLABUS
Contact
Module No. Syllabus Description
Hours
Maintenance Concepts: Functions and objectives of maintenance,
maintenance strategies, maintenance scheduling, organization and spare 9
1
parts management, various methods and policies of maintenance
engineering.
Predictive maintenance program: Condition based maintenance, condition
checking and inspection and trend monitoring methods, routine inspection 9
2
for pumps and compressors, preventive maintenance for rotating and
stationary equipment, planning and scheduling of preventive maintenance.
Vibration analysis: Vibration parameters selection, classification of
equipment, vibration severity charts, fault detection from vibration data, 9
3
troubleshooting of mechanical equipment, wear debris analysis, oil
analysis.
Reliability centered maintenance: Maintenance division models, reliability
oriented maintenance systems, total productive maintenance (TPM) and 9
4
benchmarking. procedures of JIT maintenance, zero defect maintenance
and zero breakdown maintenance systems.
 Course Assessment Method
(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

● 2 Questions from each ● Each question carries 9 marks.
module. ● Two questions will be given from each module, out
● Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
carrying 3 marks ● Each question can have a maximum of 3 60
subdivisions.
(8x3 =24 marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)

Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)

CO1 Explain the procedures of maintenance management. K2

CO2 Plan for predictive maintenance program in industries. K3

CO3 Make use of condition monitoring techniques for fault detection. K3

Develop maintenance procedures in line with a total productive
CO4 K3
maintenance approach.
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create
 CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 - - - - - - - - - - 2

CO2 3 - 2 - - 2 - - - - - 2

CO3 3 - 2 - - 2 - - - - - 2

CO4 3 - 2 - - 2 - - - - - 2

Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books

Edition and
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s Name of the Publisher
Year
1 Plant Maintenance and Cengage Learning 1st Ed.,
Prof. N V S Raju
Reliability Engineering India Publications 2011

2 Engineering maintenance: A 1st Ed.,

B S Dhillon CRC Press
modern approach 2002

Reliability Engineering:
2nd Ed.,
3 Probabilistic Models and Joel A Nachlas
CRC Press 2017
Maintenance Methods

Reference Books
Name of the Name of the Edition and
Sl. No Title of the Book
Author/s Publisher Year
Reliability Centered Jesus R. Sifonte, James
1 Maintenance – Reengineered V Reyes-Picknell Productivity Press 1st Ed., 2017

Condition Monitoring in Large

2nd Ed.,
2 Thermal Power Plants : Power Shrikant Bhave Notions Press
2016
Plant Condition Monitoring

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

https://onlinecourses.swayam2.ac.in/nou21_me10/
Link ID
https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/112/105/112105232/
 SEMESTER: S8

DYNAMICS OF MACHINERY

Course Code PEPET864 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) None Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. To familiarise the concepts of static and dynamic force analysis techniques and the
principles of gyroscopic couple and balancing in dynamics.
2. To equip students to apply the concepts of single and multi-degree freedom vibrational
behaviour to solve engineering problems.

SYLLABUS

Module Syllabus Description Contact

No. Hours
Force analysis: Static force analysis-Freebody diagram - conditions for
equilibrium - two and three force members, four force members - numerical
1 examples involving single four bar chain and single slider crank chain. 9
Dynamic force analysis: Inertia force and inertia torque D’Alembert’s
principle, force acting on the reciprocating parts of an engine, piston effort,
force acting along the connecting rod, thrust on the sides of cylinder walls,
crank pin effort and thrust on the crankshaft bearings - numerical examples.
Flywheel analysis: Flywheel, turning moment diagram, flywheel in different
applications like IC engines, punching press - numerical examples.
2 Gyroscopics: Gyroscopic couple and precessional motion, effect of 9
gyroscopic couple on aeroplanes, ships - numerical examples.
Balancing of rotating masses: Static and dynamic balancing, reference plane
method for balancing of masses for different panes - analytical and graphical
approach.
Longitudinal vibration: Single and two degree freedom system, overview of
free vibration responses, equation of motion, underdamped, overdamped and
critically damped response.
3 9
Forced vibration: Frequency response curve, vibration isolation,
 transmissibility-numerical examples. Accelerometer, seismometer.
Vibration of two-degree of freedoms system: Influence coefficient method -
numerical examples. Vibration absorbers.
Vibration of multi-degree freedom system: Transverse vibration, concept of
4 node, mode, mode shape. Dunkerley’s method, critical or whirling speed of 9
shaft.
Torsional vibration of shaft: Torsionally Equivalent shaft - two rotor and
three rotor systems, free torsional vibration of geared systems - numerical
examples.

Course Assessment Method (CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination- Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
1 (Written) (Written)

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

● 2 Questions from each ● Each question carries 9 marks.

module.
● Two questions will be given from each module,
● Total of 8 Questions, out of which 1 question should be answered. 60
each carrying 3 marks
● Each question can have a maximum of
3 subdivisions.
(8x3 = 24 marks)
(4x9 = 36 marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcomes Knowledge
Level (KL)
Explain the fundamental principles of dynamics and their
CO1 application to machinery; analyse the forces acting on the K4
machine components.
Apply the principles and applications of flywheels,
CO2 K3
calculation of gyroscopic angular momentum, torque and
stability.
Analyse and predict the vibrational behaviour of the mechanical
CO3 system. K4
Apply the concepts and analysis of damped vibration and the
CO4 K3
effects of damping on vibrational behaviour.
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 3 - - - 2 - - - - - 2

CO2 3 3 - - - 2 - - - - - 2

CO3 3 3 - - - 2 - - - - - 2

CO4 3 3 - - - 2 - - - - - 2
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
1 Theory of Machines S S Rattan Tata Mc Graw-Hill 4th Ed., 2017

2 Theory of Vibrations with W T Thomson Prentice Hall 5th Ed., 2014

Applications
3 Theory of Machines- Sadhu Singh Pearson Edu India 3rd Ed., 2012
Kinematics and Dynamics
4 Theory of Machines D S Kumar Laxmi Publications 4th Ed., 2019
 Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Vibration and noise for 4th Ed., 2007
1 Kewal Pujara Dhanpat Rai & CO
Engineers
Oxford University 4th Ed., 2018
2 Theory of Machines Thomas Bevan
Press
Theory of Machines and McGraw Hill 3rd Ed., 2019
3 J S Rao and D.K Sharma
Dynamics of Machinery Education
4 Tata McGraw-Hill 4th Ed., 2019
Theory of machines N K Gupta
Education
5 3rd Ed., 2017
Theory of Machines R.K Bansal Laxmi Publications

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/112/104/112104114/
Link ID
https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/112/107/112107212/
https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/112/103/112103111/
 SEMESTER: S8

INDUSTRIAL SAFETY ENGINEERING

Course Code PEPET865 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 5/3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) None Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. To familiarise the concepts of safety, hazard and its issues.

2. To enable students to apply various safety management and safety audit techniques.

SYLLABUS
Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Introduction: Need for safety, safety and productivity, accident, injury,
unsafe act, unsafe condition, theories of accident causation.
Safety organization: objectives, types, functions, safety policy, safety
1 officer - responsibilities, authority. Safety committee - need, types, 9
advantages.
Personal protection: Types of personal protective equipment (PPE),
respiratory and non-respiratory equipment, standards related to PPE.
Hazards and risk: Types of hazards - classification of fire, types of fire
extinguishers, fire explosion and toxic gas release, structure of hazard
identification and risk assessment.
2 Identification of hazards: Inventory analysis, fire and explosion hazard 9
rating of process plants, Dow’s index, Preliminary hazard analysis, Hazard
and Operability (HAZOP) analysis- methodology, criticality analysis,
corrective action and follow-up.
Machinery safeguard: Point-of-operation, principle of machine guarding,
types of guards and devices.
3 9
Safety in process: Safety in turning, grinding, rolling, forging, welding and
cutting processes.
 Material Handling: Classification, safety consideration - manual and
mechanical handling. Handling assessments and techniques - lifting,
carrying, pulling, pushing, palletizing and stocking. Material handling
equipment - operation & maintenance.
Safety audit: Objectives of safety audit, limitations and benefits of safety
audit, types of safety audits - industrial/workplace safety audit, fire safety
4 audit, audit methodology, audit checklist and report, significance of 9
performing a safety audit, conducting safety audit, pre-audit activities, on-
site activities, post audit activities, safety inspection vs safety audit.

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Attendance Internal Ex Evaluate Analyse Total

5 15 10 10 40

Criteria for Assessment (Analyse and Evaluate): 20 marks

Phases Assessment Criteria Marks

Problem Definition

. Clearly defines the real-world quality issue. 5

. Examine and identify relevant contextual factors.

Analyse Problem Analysis

. Present a structured realistic solution methodology. 5

. Compare and justify the proposed solutions with evidence and

logical reasoning

Validation of Results

. Thoroughly evaluate the proposed solutions.

5
. Compares trade-offs, advantages, and disadvantages.

. Considers feasibility, scalability, and practical implications.

Evaluate
Conclusion and Report Writing

. Summarizes procedure, findings and insights, limitation, and

5
scope for future work.

. Preparation of Report with all components of project report.

 End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

● 2 Questions from each ● Each question carries 9 marks.
module. ● Two questions will be given from each module, out
● Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
carrying 3 marks ● Each question can have a maximum of 3 60
subdivisions.
(8x3 =24 marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)

Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
Explain the basic concepts of safety and personal protective
CO1 K2
equipment.
Demonstrate different types of hazards and apply methods of
CO2 K3
hazard identification.
Explain the safety issues in machinery, processes and material
CO3 K2
handling systems.
CO4 Apply safety audit concepts and methodologies. K3
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping odd Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 - 1 - - 3 - - - - - 2

CO2 3 - 2 - - 3 - - - - - 2

CO3 3 - 1 - - 3 - - - - - 2

CO4 3 - 2 - - 3 - - - - - 2
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation
 Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Industrial Safety, Health and
1 R K Jain and Sunil S 1st Ed.,
Environment management Khanna Publications
Rao 2000
systems.
Safety management System
2 1st Ed.,
and Documentation training Paul S V CBS Publication
2019
Programme handbook.

Reference Books
Sl. Name of the Name of the Edition and
Title of the Book
No Author/s Publisher Year
Safety management in Jaico Publishing
1 Krishnan N V 1st Ed., 1996
Industry House
John V Grimaldi and
2 Safety management Irwin 5th Ed., 1989
Rollin H Simonds

3 Industrial safety Ronald P Blake Prentice Hall India 3rd Ed., 2000

Chapman & Hall,

4 Safety management system Alan Waring 1st Ed., 1996
England

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

Link ID https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/110/105/110105094/
 SEMESTER: S8

RENEWABLE ENERGY ENGINEERING

Course Code ОЕРЕТ831 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) None Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. To provide students with a comprehensive knowledge of various renewable energy resources

and their technological applications.
2. To familiarise students with implementation and environmental impacts of renewable energy
technologies.
SYLLABUS
Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Global energy scenario: Energy demand and consumption, conventional
and renewable energy sources.
Solar radiation and solar thermal systems: Solar constant, spectral
distribution, measurement of solar radiation. Solar thermal systems - flat
plate collectors, concentrating collectors, solar water heaters, solar dryers,
1
solar cooling systems.
9
Solar electrical systems: Photovoltaic (PV) technology - PV cells and
materials, PV modules and arrays, PV system design and applications,
maximum power point tracking, solar cell characteristics, stand-alone and
grid-connected PV systems.
Wind energy fundamentals: Wind characteristics, wind power equation,
power extraction from wind. Wind turbines - types of wind turbines,
horizontal and vertical axis wind turbines, components and operation,
wind farm layout and design. Wind power generation - stand-alone and

2 grid-connected wind systems, hybrid systems.

Bio-energy: Types of biomass, availability and potential, biomass 9

conversion technologies - thermo-chemical processes, biochemical

processes, applications of biomass in power generation, heating, and
transportation.
 Geothermal energy: Geothermal resources and types of geothermal power
plants - dry steam, flash steam, binary cycle.
Ocean energy: Ocean thermal energy conversion, tidal energy, types of
tidal power plants, wave energy and wave energy converters.
3 9
Hydropower: Small, mini and micro hydropower plants, components and
environmental impacts.
Fuel cells: Fundamentals, working principles of fuel cells, types of fuel
cells.
Environmental impact of renewable energy: Impact on ecosystems,
carbon footprint reduction, carbon credits.
Economics of renewable energy systems: Cost analysis, payback period,
life-cycle analysis and costing.
4
Renewable energy policies and regulations: National and international 9
energy policies, renewable energy targets, government schemes and
incentives - India’s national solar mission, renewable energy purchase
obligations.

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

2 Questions from each Each question carries 9 marks.
module. Two questions will be given from each module, out
Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
carrying 3 marks Each question can have a maximum of 3 60
subdivisions.
(8x3 =24 marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
Explain the fundamentals of renewable energy, solar radiation, thermal
CO1 K2
systems and electrical systems.
CO2 Demonstrate wind energy fundamentals and bio energy. K2
Explain geothermal, ocean and hydropower energy systems as well as
CO3 K2
fuel cell technologies.
Demonstrate environmental and economic impact of renewable energy
CO4 K2
systems; explain renewable energy policies and regulations.
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 - 1 - - 2 2 - - - - 2

CO2 3 - 2 - - 2 2 - - - - 2
CO3 3 - 2 - - 2 2 - - - - 2

CO4 3 - 2 - - 2 2 - - - - 2
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
D P Kothari, K C
1 Renewable Energy Sources PHI Learning Pvt 3rd Ed.,
Singal and Rakesh 2021
and Emerging Technologies Ltd
Ranjan
2 Renewable Energy: Power 4th Ed.,
Stephen Peake OUP Oxford 2017
for a Sustainable Future
3 Energy Storage for Behnam Zakeri and 1st Ed.,
Elsevier 2022
Renewable Energy Systems Sanna Syri
 Reference Books
Name of the Name of the Edition and
Sl. No Title of the Book
Author/s Publisher Year
Fundamentals of Renewable Academic Press 1st Ed.,
1 Akwas Boateng
Energy Processes Inc 2017
Elsevier/bsp 1st Ed.,
2 Energy Management Murphy W. R.
Books Pvt. Ltd. 2003

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

Link ID https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/103/103/103103206/
 SEMESTER: S8

OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH

Course Code OEPET832 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

None
Prerequisites (if any) Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. To familiarise the aspects of occupational safety and health in industries.

2. To equip students to apply various techniques available for ensuring safety in industries.

SYLLABUS
Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Introduction: Safety, quality and productivity, safety organizations, safety
committees and structure, role of management in industrial safety,
occupational safety and health act, environmental management systems and

1 ISO 14001. 9
Industrial hygiene: History, housekeeping, OSHA and industrial hygiene,
safety and health program management, education and training for industrial
safety and hygiene.
Fire hazards and fire extinguishers: Fire chemistry, causes of fire, classes of
fire, principles of fire extinction, water sprinkler and fire hydrant, explosion
2 9
protection system, alarm and detection system, suppression system, carbon
dioxide system, foam system, halon system, portable extinguisher.
Workplace stressors and associated hazards: Chemical stressor, physical
stressor, biological stressor, ergonomic stressor, noise, vibration and their
control, radiation safety program, thermal stressors and their control,
3 9
ventilation investigation and analysis.
Industrial toxicology: Material safety data sheet, hazard communication
standard, airborne contaminants, air monitoring and sampling.
 Hazard identification methods: Safety inspection, job safety analysis, risk
analysis methods - map method and tabular method, fault tree analysis,
HAZOP analysis.

4 Hazard control: Hierarchy of control - elimination, substitution, engineering 9

control, administrative control, personal protection equipment (PPE),
training, maintenance and storage of PPE, accident precautions, economic
aspects of accidents, accident reporting.

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

● 2 Questions from each ● Each question carries 9 marks.
module. ● Two questions will be given from each module, out
● Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
carrying 3 marks ● Each question can have a maximum of 3 60
subdivisions.
(8x3 =24 marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
CO1 Explain basic aspects of occupational safety and industrial hygiene. K2
CO2 Demonstrate fire hazards and extinguishing methods. K2
CO3 Explain workplace stressors and associated hazards. K2
CO4 Apply hazard identification methods and hazard control. K3
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 - 2 - - 3 - - - - - 2

CO2 3 - 2 - - 3 - - - - - 2

CO3 3 - 2 - - 3 - - - - - 2

CO4 3 - 3 - - 3 - - - - - 2
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
1 3rd Ed.,
Industrial Safety Blake R P Prentice Hall
2006
2 3rd Ed.,
Industrial Safety Management Deshmukh L M Tata McGraw Hill
2008
 Reference Books
Name of the Edition and
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher Year
Industrial Safety, Health and
1 Environmental Management Jain R K and Sunil Rao Khanna Delhi 1st Ed., 2006
Systems

2 Chemical Hazards and Safety Shrikant Dawande Khanna Publishers 2nd Ed., 2012

Chemical Process Safety:

Daniel A Crowl and
3 Fundamentals with Prentice Hall 3rd Ed., 2011
Joseph F Louvar
applications
John V Grimaldi and
4 Safety management Irwin 5th Ed., 1989
Rollin H Simonds
Industrial Hygiene Simplified:
A Guide to Anticipation,
5 Frank R Spellman Bernan Press 2nd Ed., 2017
Recognition, Evaluation, and
Control of Workplace Hazards

6 Industrial Safety Blake R B Prentice Hall 3rd Ed., 2000

Techniques of Safety
Amer Society of
7 Management: A system Dan Petersen 4th Ed., 2003
Safety Engineers
Approach

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

Link ID https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/110/105/110105094/
 SEMESTER: S8

DIGITAL MARKETING

Course Code OEPET833 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) None Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. To familiarize the basics of digital marketing principles, strategies and tools.

2. To enable students to apply the practical skills in digital marketing.

SYLLABUS
Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Digital marketing foundations: Introduction to digital marketing, traditional
marketing vs. digital marketing, digital marketing process, website planning

1 and development, domain and web hosting, building websites using CMS 9
WordPress, wordPress plug-ins.
Search engine optimization (SEO): Introduction, keyword planner tools.
Digital marketing optimization: On-page SEO techniques, content
optimization, Yoast SEO plug-in, off-page SEO techniques.

2 Email marketing: Introduction, designing email marketing campaigns using 9

mail chimp, building email lists and signup forms, email marketing strategy
and monitoring and email automation.
Digital advertising and analytics: Pay per click advertising, introduction,
google AdWords, bidding strategies, designing and monitoring search
3 9
campaigns, display campaigns, video campaigns, universal app campaigns,
Google Analytics - introduction, interface and setup.
Social media and integrated digital marketing: Social media marketing
introduction, facebook marketing, twitter marketing, LinkedIn marketing,
4 9
developing digital marketing strategy, integrating digital marketing channels,
measuring digital marketing success, digital marketing case studies.
 Course Assessment Method
(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

● 2 Questions from each ● Each question carries 9 marks.
module. ● Two questions will be given from each module, out
● Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
carrying 3 marks ● Each question can have a maximum of 3 60
subdivisions.
(8x3 =24 marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)

Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
CO1 Explain the principles and concepts of digital marketing. K2
Apply SEO techniques for content optimization and explain the
CO2 K3
concepts of email marketing.
Make use of digital advertising and Google Analytics for developing
CO3 K3
marketing strategies.
CO4 Demonstrate social media and integrated digital marketing. K2
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create
 CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 2 - - - - - - - - - - 2

CO2 3 - 2 - 2 - - - - - - 2

CO3 3 - 2 - 3 - - - - - - 2

CO4 2 - - - - - - - - - - 2
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year

1 Seema Gupta 3rd Ed.,

Digital Marketing McGraw Hill
2022

Digital Marketing Strategy: An

Kogan page
2 Integrated Approach to Online Simon Kingsnorth 2nd Ed.,
publications
Marketing 2022

Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Digital Marketing: Strategy, 1st Ed.,
1 Dave Chaffey Pearson Education
Implementation, and Practice 2022
Digital Marketing Kamlesh Kudacya McGraw Hill 1st Ed.,
2
Education 2022
1st Ed.,
Digital Marketing: A Practical
3 Anita Goyal Pearson Education 2020
Approach
Brian Halligan, 2nd Ed.,
4 Inbound Marketing Wiley
Dharmesh Shah 2014
Content Marketing: A Practical 1st Ed.,
5 Pamela Muldoon Routledge
Approach 2020
Email Marketing By the 1st Ed.,
6 Chris Baggott Wiley
Numbers 2017
1st Ed.,
7 Google Analytics Breakthrough Feras Alhlou Wiley
2020
Social Media Marketing: An 1st Ed.,
8 Dave Evans Wiley
Hour a Day 2018
1st Ed.,
9 Digital Marketing Analytics Chuck Hemann Routledge
2020
 Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)
https://onlinecourses.swayam2.ac.in/imb25_mg31/
Link ID
https://onlinecourses.swayam2.ac.in/cec19_mg23/